1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
176 by the \SpecialChar LyX
181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
183 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
184 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
185 Documentation mailing list:
186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
188 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 \begin_inset Note Note
211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
212 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
213 \begin_inset Newline newline
218 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
226 \begin_layout Standard
227 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
228 LatexCommand tableofcontents
235 \begin_layout Chapter
239 \begin_layout Section
240 What is \SpecialChar LyX
244 \begin_layout Standard
246 is a document preparation system.
247 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
248 scripts, publishable books, business
249 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
250 It is unlike most other
251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
258 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
260 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
276 pt type, left justified, 5
277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
286 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
290 \begin_layout Standard
291 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
296 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
300 \begin_layout Standard
305 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
306 's philosophy: most importantly,
307 the format of all of the manuals.
308 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
309 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
315 manual describes that, too.
318 \begin_layout Section
323 \begin_layout Standard
324 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
325 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
327 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
328 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
332 \begin_layout Standard
333 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
334 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
335 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
337 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
338 only a vertical scrollbar.
339 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
340 The first case is large images.
341 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
342 image and use the option
353 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
356 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
357 this doesn't work for equations yet.
360 \begin_layout Standard
361 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
362 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
370 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
377 \begin_layout Section
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
384 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
386 Just select the manual you want to read from the
393 \begin_layout Section
394 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
398 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
405 \begin_layout Standard
406 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
407 can be configured via the menu
409 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
413 \begin_inset Index idx
416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
423 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
425 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
426 packages are available.
427 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
429 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
431 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
436 \begin_inset space \space{}
439 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
440 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
442 To force \SpecialChar LyX
443 to re-inspect your system, you should use
445 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
449 \begin_inset Index idx
452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
453 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
459 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
460 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
463 \begin_layout Section
466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
468 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
475 \begin_layout Standard
476 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
477 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
478 installed, but you will not be
479 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
480 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
481 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
482 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
483 document can always be output as plain text
487 \begin_layout Standard
488 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
489 or DocBook classes or packages.
490 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
491 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
494 \begin_layout Standard
495 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
496 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
497 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
500 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
508 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
509 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
512 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
528 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
535 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
539 \begin_layout Chapter
540 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
544 \begin_layout Section
545 Basic File Operations
546 \begin_inset Index idx
549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
558 \begin_layout Standard
563 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
564 in addition to some more advanced operations:
567 \begin_layout Itemize
589 \begin_layout Itemize
605 arg "buffer-new-template"
611 \begin_layout Itemize
633 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
645 \begin_layout Itemize
647 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
659 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
675 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
685 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \begin_layout Itemize
719 arg "buffer-write-as"
723 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
727 \begin_layout Itemize
729 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
745 \begin_layout Itemize
759 \begin_layout Itemize
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
775 a few minor differences.
778 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
789 command lists the available templates.
790 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
791 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
792 and possibly propose text fragments
794 for the document, features
795 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
798 you would otherwise need to
799 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
801 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
805 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
809 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
817 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
823 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
824 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
828 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
836 \begin_layout Standard
837 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
869 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
870 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
871 is just that — a big, blank space.
879 \begin_layout Standard
900 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
905 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
908 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
926 will reload the document from disk.
927 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
928 and want to restore it to the last save.
937 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
938 them as your changes.
941 \begin_layout Section
942 Basic Editing Features
943 \begin_inset Index idx
946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
955 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
962 \begin_layout Standard
963 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
964 can perform cut and paste operations
965 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
966 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
967 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
968 editing features and how to access
970 We will start with cut and paste.
973 \begin_layout Standard
974 As you might expect, the
978 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
979 various other editing features.
980 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
984 \begin_layout Itemize
990 \begin_inset Index idx
993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1022 \begin_layout Itemize
1028 \begin_inset Index idx
1031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1060 \begin_layout Itemize
1066 \begin_inset Index idx
1069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1094 \begin_layout Itemize
1098 \begin_inset space ~
1104 \begin_layout Itemize
1108 \begin_inset space ~
1114 \begin_layout Itemize
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1122 \begin_inset space ~
1128 \begin_inset Index idx
1131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1140 \begin_inset Index idx
1143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1158 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1168 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1174 \begin_layout Standard
1175 The first three are self-explanatory.
1176 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1177 and other programs by
1198 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1199 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1204 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1205 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1206 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1207 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1208 into individual cells.
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1217 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1218 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1222 \begin_layout Standard
1226 \begin_inset space ~
1231 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1233 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1248 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1249 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1250 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1256 \begin_inset space \space{}
1259 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1260 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1263 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1268 \begin_inset space ~
1272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1285 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1286 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1288 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1298 start a new paragraph.
1299 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1300 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1305 \begin_inset space ~
1308 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1314 \begin_inset space ~
1322 \begin_inset space ~
1325 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1328 paste from the primary selection.
1329 This is normally the currently selected text.
1332 \begin_layout Standard
1335 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1337 \begin_inset space ~
1341 \begin_inset space ~
1349 \begin_inset space ~
1353 \begin_inset space ~
1359 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1365 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1382 button to skip the current word.
1386 \begin_inset space ~
1391 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1395 \begin_inset space ~
1400 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1402 If the toggle is set, searching for
1403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1414 will not match the word
1415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 Match whole words only
1431 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1432 to only find complete words, e.
1433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1462 offers also an advanced
1465 \begin_inset space ~
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1474 feature that is described in section
1475 \begin_inset space ~
1479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1481 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1488 \begin_layout Standard
1489 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1490 \begin_inset space \space{}
1494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1502 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1504 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1509 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1516 \begin_layout Standard
1520 arg "inset-select-all"
1523 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1524 When the cursor is inside an inset
1527 arg "inset-select-all"
1530 selects the content of the inset.
1534 arg "inset-select-all"
1537 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1542 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1545 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1549 \begin_layout Section
1551 \begin_inset Index idx
1554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1561 \begin_inset Index idx
1564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1573 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1580 \begin_layout Standard
1581 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1583 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1586 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1589 or the toolbar button
1595 to undo some mistake.
1596 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1598 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1601 or the toolbar button
1608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1615 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1619 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1622 \begin_layout Standard
1623 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1632 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1633 This is a consequence of the 100
1634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1637 step undo limit mentioned above.
1640 \begin_layout Standard
1649 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1651 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1655 \begin_layout Section
1657 \begin_inset Index idx
1660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1669 \begin_layout Standard
1670 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1673 \begin_layout Enumerate
1678 \begin_layout Itemize
1683 once anywhere in the edit window.
1684 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1688 \begin_layout Enumerate
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1700 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1703 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1706 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1707 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1710 \begin_layout Itemize
1711 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1714 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1721 \begin_layout Enumerate
1722 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1727 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1728 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1732 \begin_layout Section
1734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1736 name "sec:Navigating"
1741 \begin_inset Index idx
1744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1753 \begin_layout Standard
1755 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1758 \begin_layout Itemize
1763 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1764 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1767 \begin_layout Itemize
1768 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1770 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1772 \begin_inset space ~
1777 or by the toolbar button
1780 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1786 \begin_layout Itemize
1787 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1789 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1792 and use the same menu to return to them.
1793 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1800 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1805 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1806 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1808 \begin_inset space ~
1813 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1814 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1815 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1816 your last editing position.
1819 \begin_layout Standard
1824 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1828 \begin_layout Subsection
1830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1832 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1837 \begin_inset Index idx
1840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1841 Navigating ! Outline
1847 \begin_inset Index idx
1850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1859 \begin_layout Standard
1860 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1861 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1862 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1864 \begin_inset space ~
1868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1870 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1874 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1875 \begin_inset space ~
1879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1881 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1886 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1890 \begin_layout Standard
1891 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1892 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1893 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1894 dialog and to modify the citation.
1897 \begin_layout Standard
1902 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1903 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1905 Labels and References
1907 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1916 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1919 \begin_layout Standard
1920 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1921 you further to control the display.
1926 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1927 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1933 option keeps it in the current view state.
1934 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1938 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1942 3, the subsections of sections
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1946 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1951 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1952 \begin_inset space ~
1956 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1966 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1976 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1977 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1991 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1992 So, for example, you can move section
1993 \begin_inset space ~
1997 \begin_inset space ~
2000 2.4 or after section
2001 \begin_inset space ~
2006 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2019 (or the corresponding key bindings
2027 ) you can change the level of sections.
2028 So you can for example make section
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2033 \begin_inset space ~
2037 \begin_inset space ~
2043 \begin_layout Standard
2044 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2045 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2048 \begin_layout Subsection
2049 Horizontal Scrolling
2050 \begin_inset Index idx
2053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2054 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2062 \begin_layout Standard
2064 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2070 \begin_inset space \space{}
2074 \begin_inset space ~
2077 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2078 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2079 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2083 \begin_layout Standard
2084 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2088 \begin_layout Itemize
2090 is used on a small tablet computer
2093 \begin_layout Itemize
2094 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2106 \begin_inset space ~
2119 \begin_layout Itemize
2120 Math constructs with long command names
2123 \begin_layout Standard
2124 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2125 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2127 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2128 windows so that table
2129 \begin_inset space ~
2133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2135 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2140 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2142 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2143 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2146 \begin_layout Standard
2147 \begin_inset Float table
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2160 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2164 Horizontal scrolling test.
2172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2174 \begin_inset Tabular
2175 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2176 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2221 \begin_layout Section
2222 Input/Word Completion
2223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2225 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2230 \begin_inset Index idx
2233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2240 \begin_inset Index idx
2243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2274 \begin_layout Standard
2276 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2278 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2279 is used to propose completions.
2282 \begin_layout Standard
2283 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2286 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2291 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2298 \begin_inset space ~
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2307 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2311 \begin_inset space ~
2316 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2317 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2321 \begin_inset space ~
2327 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2328 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2329 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2330 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2333 \begin_layout Standard
2335 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2336 completions available.
2341 key to accept a proposed completion.
2342 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2343 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2344 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2351 \begin_layout Standard
2352 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2353 ing options for text.
2355 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2357 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2359 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2362 he special math option
2366 enables characters to be composed.
2367 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2368 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2371 , you can then input the characters
2372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2383 to a formula to get it.
2384 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2385 of the math toolbar.
2386 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2390 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2391 's installation folder.
2393 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2394 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2401 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2406 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2407 In the example above,
2412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2444 \begin_layout Section
2446 \begin_inset Index idx
2449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2456 \begin_inset Index idx
2459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2488 \begin_inset Index idx
2491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2522 \begin_layout Standard
2523 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2537 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2540 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2544 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2545 \begin_inset space ~
2549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2551 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2558 \begin_layout Standard
2562 \begin_inset space ~
2570 \begin_inset space ~
2591 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2595 \begin_layout Labeling
2596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2600 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2601 LatexCommand nomenclature
2603 description "Tabulator key"
2610 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2612 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2613 \begin_inset space ~
2617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2619 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2626 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2630 , especially section
2631 \begin_inset space ~
2635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2637 reference "subsec:Lists"
2643 If you are still confused, look in the
2648 \begin_inset Newline newline
2656 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2657 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2661 \begin_layout Labeling
2662 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2666 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2667 LatexCommand nomenclature
2669 description "Escape key"
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2684 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2685 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2688 \begin_layout Labeling
2689 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2695 \begin_inset space ~
2699 \begin_inset space ~
2706 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2707 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2711 \begin_layout Standard
2712 There are three modifier keys:
2715 \begin_layout Labeling
2716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2734 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2735 LatexCommand nomenclature
2737 description "Control key"
2742 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2743 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2747 \begin_layout Itemize
2756 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2759 \begin_layout Itemize
2768 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2771 \begin_layout Itemize
2780 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2784 \begin_layout Labeling
2785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2803 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2804 LatexCommand nomenclature
2806 description "Shift key"
2811 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2812 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2815 \begin_layout Labeling
2816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2834 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2835 LatexCommand nomenclature
2837 description "Alt or Meta key"
2842 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2843 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2844 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2850 \begin_inset Newline newline
2853 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2855 menu accelerator keys
2858 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2859 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2863 \begin_layout Standard
2864 For example, the sequence
2865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2871 \begin_inset space ~
2875 \begin_inset space ~
2881 \begin_inset space ~
2889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2908 \begin_inset space ~
2914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2924 \begin_layout Standard
2929 manual lists all other things bound to the
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2938 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2940 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2941 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2942 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2943 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2944 The \SpecialChar LyX
2945 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2946 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2947 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2949 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2965 followed by a capital
2972 \begin_layout Chapter
2975 \begin_inset Index idx
2978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2988 \begin_layout Section
2990 \begin_inset Index idx
2993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3002 \begin_layout Subsection
3006 \begin_layout Standard
3007 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3008 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3009 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3010 numbering schemes, and so on.
3011 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3012 and format the title of your document differently.
3015 \begin_layout Standard
3020 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3021 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3022 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3023 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3024 picks one for you by default.
3025 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3028 \begin_layout Subsection
3030 \begin_inset Index idx
3033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3042 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3049 \begin_layout Standard
3050 You can select a class using the
3052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3053 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3057 \begin_inset Index idx
3060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3067 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3075 \begin_layout Standard
3076 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3081 \begin_layout Description
3082 Article for basic articles
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Report for basic reports
3089 \begin_layout Description
3090 Book for writing a book
3093 \begin_layout Description
3094 Letter for US-style letters
3097 \begin_layout Standard
3098 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3099 only uses if you have installed
3100 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3101 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3102 distributions will include
3104 Here are some of the classes.
3105 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3116 \begin_layout Description
3117 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3120 \begin_layout Description
3121 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3125 \begin_layout Description
3126 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3130 \begin_layout Description
3131 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3132 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3133 There are three article layouts available.
3134 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3135 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3136 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3137 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3142 sequential numbering
3143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3146 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3147 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3148 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3149 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3152 \begin_layout Description
3153 Beamer Layout for presentations
3156 \begin_layout Description
3157 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3158 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3159 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3160 with \SpecialChar LyX
3164 \begin_layout Description
3165 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3168 \begin_layout Description
3170 \begin_inset space ~
3173 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3176 \begin_layout Description
3177 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3180 \begin_layout Description
3181 Foils Used to make transparencies
3184 \begin_layout Description
3185 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3186 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3187 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3188 with \SpecialChar LyX
3192 \begin_layout Description
3193 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3194 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3197 \begin_layout Description
3198 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3201 \begin_layout Description
3202 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3205 \begin_layout Description
3206 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3207 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3208 (Is used by this document.)
3211 \begin_layout Description
3212 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3215 \begin_layout Description
3216 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3219 \begin_layout Description
3224 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3225 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3227 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3231 \begin_layout Description
3232 Slides Used to make transparencies
3235 \begin_layout Description
3237 \begin_inset space ~
3240 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3241 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3244 \begin_layout Description
3245 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3251 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3253 Special Document Classes
3260 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3261 of the document classes.
3264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3268 \begin_layout Standard
3269 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3272 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3274 \begin_inset Index idx
3277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3294 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3295 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3297 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3300 \begin_layout Standard
3303 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3308 , are highly specialized.
3310 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3311 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3312 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3313 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3314 by some document class.
3315 There are just too many of them.
3316 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3319 \begin_layout Standard
3320 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3328 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3329 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3330 document class for a new file.
3332 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3335 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3342 manual for information on how to install them.
3343 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3349 \begin_layout Standard
3350 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3351 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3352 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3353 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3354 class files to be used for dissertation
3355 s submitted to those universities.
3356 The \SpecialChar LyX
3357 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3359 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3363 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3369 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3376 name "subsec:Modules"
3381 \begin_inset Index idx
3384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3393 \begin_layout Standard
3394 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3395 chosen document class.
3396 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3397 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3404 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3408 \begin_inset Index idx
3411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3418 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3422 \begin_layout Standard
3423 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3424 packages or file format converters that are not always
3425 installed by default.
3427 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3428 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3429 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3430 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3432 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3433 file without the missing prerequisites.
3434 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3435 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3438 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3442 \begin_inset Index idx
3445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3446 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3452 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3457 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3460 \begin_layout Standard
3461 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3469 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3471 will advise you about these things.
3479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3483 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3488 \begin_inset Index idx
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3492 Document ! Local Layout
3500 \begin_layout Standard
3501 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3502 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3503 : They are intended to be used in
3504 a variety of different documents.
3505 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3506 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3507 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3508 need a specific inset or
3509 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3511 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3514 style only that one time.
3515 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3517 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3535 manual for information on how to use it.
3538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3542 \begin_layout Standard
3543 Each class has a default set of options.
3544 Here's a quick table describing them:
3547 \begin_layout Standard
3548 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3554 \begin_layout Standard
3556 \begin_inset Tabular
3557 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3558 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3561 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3563 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4017 \begin_layout Standard
4018 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4024 \begin_layout Standard
4025 You're probably also wondering what
4026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4030 \begin_inset space ~
4034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4038 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4039 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4044 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4049 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4059 headings, there are also
4067 headings, and so on.
4068 We will describe these headings fully in section
4069 \begin_inset space ~
4073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4075 reference "subsec:Headings"
4082 \begin_layout Subsection
4084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4086 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4091 \begin_inset Index idx
4094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4101 \begin_inset Index idx
4104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4113 \begin_layout Standard
4114 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4123 \begin_inset space ~
4131 \begin_inset space ~
4136 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4138 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4139 doesn't support special options you want to
4140 use for your document.
4141 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4142 -class and its options, you have to read
4146 \begin_layout Standard
4148 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4152 \change_inserted -712698321 1597235164
4156 \begin_inset space ~
4163 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4169 \begin_inset space ~
4174 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4175 You can choose between the following five options:
4178 \begin_layout Labeling
4179 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4184 Use default page style of current class.
4187 \begin_layout Labeling
4188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4193 No page numbers or headings.
4196 \begin_layout Labeling
4197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4205 \begin_layout Labeling
4206 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4211 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4212 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4213 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4214 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4217 \begin_layout Labeling
4218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4223 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4224 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4230 \begin_inset Index idx
4233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4241 How they are defined is explained in section
4242 \begin_inset space ~
4246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4248 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4255 \begin_layout Standard
4256 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4257 \begin_inset space ~
4261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4263 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4270 \begin_layout Subsection
4271 Paper Size and Orientation
4272 \begin_inset Index idx
4275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4276 Document ! Paper size
4282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4284 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4291 \begin_layout Standard
4292 You can find the following options in the menu
4295 \begin_inset space ~
4302 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4306 \begin_inset Index idx
4309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4318 \begin_layout Labeling
4319 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4323 \begin_inset space ~
4328 What size paper to print on.
4333 \begin_layout Itemize
4339 \begin_layout Itemize
4345 \begin_layout Itemize
4351 \begin_layout Itemize
4357 \begin_layout Itemize
4360 US letter, US legal, US executive
4363 \begin_layout Itemize
4369 \begin_layout Itemize
4376 \begin_layout Labeling
4377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4382 To choose whether to output as
4393 \begin_layout Labeling
4394 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4398 \begin_inset space ~
4403 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4404 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4407 \begin_layout Subsection
4409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4411 name "subsec:Margins"
4416 \begin_inset Index idx
4419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4426 \begin_inset Index idx
4429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4438 \begin_layout Standard
4439 Paper margins are set in the menu
4441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4445 \begin_inset Index idx
4448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4459 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4460 the paper format and the font size into account.
4463 \begin_layout Subsection
4467 \begin_layout Standard
4468 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4474 That includes the paragraph environments.
4475 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4476 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4477 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4479 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4488 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4490 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4491 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4492 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4495 \begin_layout Section
4496 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4497 \begin_inset Index idx
4500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4501 Paragraph ! Indentation
4509 \begin_layout Subsection
4511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4513 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4520 \begin_layout Standard
4521 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4522 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4526 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4527 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4528 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4529 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4533 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4539 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4540 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4541 language than English.
4543 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4546 \begin_layout Standard
4547 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4548 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4549 into \SpecialChar LyX
4551 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4554 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4556 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4557 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4558 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4565 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4566 goes to produce a printable file.
4571 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4573 gives you the ability globally to change
4577 these pre-coded spacings.
4578 We will explain more later.
4581 \begin_layout Subsection
4582 Paragraph Separation
4583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4585 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4590 \begin_inset Index idx
4593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4594 Paragraph ! Separation
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4610 \begin_inset space ~
4618 \begin_inset space ~
4625 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4629 \begin_inset Index idx
4632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4638 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4641 \begin_layout Subsection
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4649 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4651 \begin_inset space ~
4656 dialog and toggle the
4659 \begin_inset space ~
4664 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4667 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4671 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4672 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4676 \begin_layout Standard
4677 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4678 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4681 \begin_layout Subsection
4683 \begin_inset Index idx
4686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4687 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4695 \begin_layout Standard
4698 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4702 \begin_inset Index idx
4705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4714 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4718 \begin_inset space ~
4727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4728 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4734 \begin_inset Index idx
4737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4744 installed to use this feature.
4749 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4751 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4753 \begin_inset space ~
4758 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4759 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4762 \begin_layout Section
4763 Paragraph Environments
4764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4766 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Paragraph ! Environments
4781 \begin_inset Index idx
4784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4785 Paragraph environments|(
4793 \begin_layout Subsection
4797 \begin_layout Standard
4798 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4801 \begin_layout Standard
4810 } \SpecialChar ldots
4820 \begin_inset Newline newline
4823 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4825 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4826 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4827 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4836 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4839 \begin_layout Standard
4840 A paragraph environment is simply a
4841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4848 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4849 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4850 scheme, labels, and so on.
4851 Additionally, you can
4852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4859 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4860 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4861 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4862 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4864 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4866 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4869 \begin_layout Standard
4870 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4871 \begin_inset Graphics
4872 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4878 at the left end of the toolbar.
4880 will change the environment of the
4884 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4885 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4886 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4890 \begin_layout Standard
4899 create a new paragraph using the
4903 paragraph environment.
4905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4912 because if you are in one of these environments:
4915 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4939 \begin_layout Itemize
4945 \begin_layout Itemize
4951 \begin_layout Itemize
4957 \begin_layout Standard
4959 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4963 , rather than resetting it to
4968 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4969 \begin_inset space ~
4973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4975 reference "sec:Nesting"
4982 \begin_layout Subsection
4986 \begin_layout Standard
4987 The default paragraph environment is
4992 It creates a plain paragraph.
4994 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4995 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4996 this manual) are in the
5003 \begin_layout Standard
5004 You can nest a paragraph using the
5008 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5016 \begin_layout Subsection
5018 \begin_inset Index idx
5021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5030 \begin_layout Standard
5031 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5032 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5041 for thanks or contact information.
5042 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5043 places all of this on a separate page
5044 along with today's date.
5045 For other types of documents, the title
5046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5053 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5057 \begin_layout Standard
5059 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5073 Here's how you use them:
5076 \begin_layout Itemize
5077 Put the title of your document in the
5084 \begin_layout Itemize
5085 Put the author name in the
5092 \begin_layout Itemize
5093 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5094 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5100 Note that using this environment is optional.
5101 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5102 will automatically insert today's date.
5103 If you don't want a date, use the option
5105 Suppress default date on front page
5109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5110 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5112 \begin_inset space ~
5120 \begin_layout Standard
5121 You can use footnotes to insert
5122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5129 or contact information.
5132 \begin_layout Subsection
5134 \begin_inset Index idx
5137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5146 name "subsec:Headings"
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5156 takes care of the numbering for you.
5159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5161 \begin_inset Index idx
5164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5165 Section headings ! Numbered
5173 \begin_layout Standard
5174 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5178 \begin_layout Enumerate
5184 \begin_layout Enumerate
5190 \begin_layout Enumerate
5196 \begin_layout Enumerate
5202 \begin_layout Enumerate
5208 \begin_layout Enumerate
5214 \begin_layout Enumerate
5220 \begin_layout Standard
5222 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5223 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5224 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5225 \change_inserted -131811572 1596358186
5227 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5233 \begin_layout Standard
5234 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5235 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5236 You group the book into chapters.
5238 does a similar grouping:
5241 \begin_layout Itemize
5246 is divided into either
5257 \begin_layout Itemize
5269 \begin_layout Itemize
5281 \begin_layout Itemize
5293 \begin_layout Itemize
5305 \begin_layout Itemize
5317 \begin_layout Standard
5318 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5326 Not all document types use the
5330 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5335 is the top-level heading.
5343 \begin_layout Standard
5348 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5349 labels it with its number,
5350 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5352 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5366 \begin_inset Index idx
5369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5370 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5378 \begin_layout Standard
5379 The unnumbered section headings have a
5380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 at the end of their name.
5388 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5389 the table of contents, see section
5390 \begin_inset space ~
5394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5404 Changing the Numbering
5405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5407 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5414 \begin_layout Standard
5415 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5416 in the Table of Contents.
5417 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5419 Just as certain classes start with
5433 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5443 This is something you can change.
5446 \begin_layout Standard
5449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5453 \begin_inset Index idx
5456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5465 \begin_inset space ~
5469 \begin_inset space ~
5474 you will see two counters.
5479 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5480 numbers a section heading.
5481 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5486 Short Titles of Headings
5487 \begin_inset Index idx
5490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5491 Section headings ! Short titles
5497 \begin_inset Argument 1
5500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5509 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5516 \begin_layout Standard
5517 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5518 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5519 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5520 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5523 \begin_layout Standard
5525 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5526 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5527 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5528 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5533 \begin_inset space ~
5539 This will insert a box labeled
5540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5544 \begin_inset space ~
5548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5551 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5552 This also works for captions inside floats.
5553 There can only be one short title per title.
5556 \begin_layout Standard
5557 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5564 \begin_layout Standard
5565 The following information applies to all section headings:
5568 \begin_layout Itemize
5569 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5572 \begin_layout Itemize
5573 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5576 \begin_layout Itemize
5577 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5580 \begin_layout Itemize
5581 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5584 \begin_layout Subsection
5588 \begin_layout Standard
5590 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5604 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5605 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5606 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5607 the text they contain.
5608 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5616 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5619 \begin_layout Standard
5620 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5629 when you start a new paragraph.
5630 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5634 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5635 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5636 have to change back to the
5640 environment yourself.
5643 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5652 \begin_inset Index idx
5655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5665 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5666 time for the differences.
5675 are identical except for one difference:
5679 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5688 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5691 \begin_layout Standard
5692 Here's an example of the
5705 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5707 See – no indentation!
5711 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5712 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5713 the other paragraph.
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5717 Here's another example, this time in the
5724 \begin_layout Quotation
5730 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5731 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5732 the first line, then
5736 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5740 you were quoting other text.
5743 \begin_layout Quotation
5744 Here's a new paragraph.
5745 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5746 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 As the examples show,
5754 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5755 They should put quotes in the
5760 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5764 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5769 \begin_inset Index idx
5772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5779 \begin_inset Index idx
5782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5798 \begin_layout Standard
5803 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5809 \begin_inset Newline newline
5812 Which I did not rehearse!
5816 It could be much worse.
5817 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5819 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5820 indented a bit more than the first.
5821 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5827 \begin_inset Newline newline
5830 And make things look fine
5831 \begin_inset Newline newline
5837 arg "newline-insert newline"
5843 \begin_layout Standard
5848 does not indent both margins.
5849 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5850 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5853 arg "newline-insert newline"
5859 \begin_layout Subsection
5861 \begin_inset Index idx
5864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5880 \begin_layout Standard
5882 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5892 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5893 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5902 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5903 lets you provide your own label.
5904 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5905 describing some general features of all four of them.
5908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5912 \begin_layout Standard
5913 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5915 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5916 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5925 reset the environment to
5929 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5930 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5931 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5935 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5939 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5946 \begin_layout Standard
5947 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5948 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5949 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5951 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5952 you read all of section
5953 \begin_inset space ~
5957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5959 reference "sec:Nesting"
5966 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5987 \begin_layout Standard
5988 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5992 paragraph environment.
5993 It has the following properties:
5996 \begin_layout Itemize
5997 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6001 \begin_layout Itemize
6003 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6006 \begin_layout Itemize
6007 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6011 \begin_layout Itemize
6012 The items can have any length.
6014 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6015 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6022 \begin_layout Itemize
6027 environment inside another
6031 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6035 \begin_layout Itemize
6036 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6039 \begin_layout Itemize
6041 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6044 \begin_layout Itemize
6046 \begin_inset space ~
6050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6052 reference "sec:Nesting"
6056 for a full explanation of nesting.
6060 \begin_layout Standard
6061 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6070 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6073 \begin_layout Standard
6074 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6075 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6078 \begin_layout Itemize
6079 The label for the first level
6083 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6087 \begin_layout Itemize
6088 The label for the second level is a dash.
6092 \begin_layout Itemize
6093 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6097 \begin_layout Itemize
6098 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6102 \begin_layout Itemize
6103 Back out to the third level.
6107 \begin_layout Itemize
6108 Back to the second level.
6112 \begin_layout Itemize
6113 Back to the outermost level.
6116 \begin_layout Standard
6117 These are the default labels for an
6122 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6127 dialog in the submenu
6132 \begin_inset Index idx
6135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6141 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6147 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6149 \begin_inset space ~
6153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6155 reference "sec:Nesting"
6162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6164 \begin_inset Index idx
6167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6176 name "sec:Enumerate"
6183 \begin_layout Standard
6188 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6189 It has these properties:
6192 \begin_layout Enumerate
6193 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6197 \begin_layout Enumerate
6198 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6202 \begin_layout Enumerate
6204 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6207 \begin_layout Enumerate
6212 environment resets the counter to one.
6215 \begin_layout Enumerate
6228 \begin_layout Enumerate
6229 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6230 Items can have any length.
6233 \begin_layout Enumerate
6234 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6237 \begin_layout Enumerate
6238 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6241 \begin_layout Enumerate
6242 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6246 \begin_layout Standard
6255 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6257 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6258 labels the four different levels in an
6265 \begin_layout Enumerate
6266 The first level of an
6270 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6274 \begin_layout Enumerate
6275 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6279 \begin_layout Enumerate
6280 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6284 \begin_layout Enumerate
6285 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6288 \begin_layout Enumerate
6289 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6294 \begin_layout Enumerate
6295 Back to the third level
6299 \begin_layout Enumerate
6300 Back to the second level.
6304 \begin_layout Enumerate
6305 Back to the outermost level.
6308 \begin_layout Standard
6309 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6313 environment, see section
6314 \begin_inset space ~
6318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6320 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6325 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6329 \begin_layout Standard
6330 There is more to nesting
6334 environments than we've stated here.
6335 You should read section
6336 \begin_inset space ~
6340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6342 reference "sec:Nesting"
6346 to learn more about nesting.
6349 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6351 \begin_inset Index idx
6354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6363 \begin_layout Standard
6364 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6368 list has no fixed label.
6369 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6378 of the first line as the label.
6382 \begin_layout Description
6383 Example: This is an example of the
6390 \begin_layout Standard
6392 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6396 \begin_layout Standard
6398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6405 it is meant that the first usage of the
6409 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6411 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6419 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6425 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6427 \begin_inset space ~
6433 \begin_inset space ~
6437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6439 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6443 for more information.) Here is an example:
6446 \begin_layout Description
6448 \begin_inset space ~
6451 Example: This one shows how to use a
6454 \begin_inset space ~
6466 \begin_layout Description
6467 Usage: You should use the
6471 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6472 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6474 It's not a good idea to use a
6478 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6479 You're better off using
6491 paragraphs into them.
6494 \begin_layout Description
6495 Nesting: You can nest
6499 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6503 \begin_layout Standard
6504 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6505 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6506 them from the first line.
6509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6511 \begin_inset Index idx
6514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6523 \begin_layout Standard
6528 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6529 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6542 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6544 Here are its properties:
6547 \begin_layout Labeling
6548 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6550 \begin_inset space ~
6553 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6562 of each line as the item label.
6567 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6568 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6569 space as described above.
6572 \begin_layout Labeling
6573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6574 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6575 uses different margins for the item label and the
6576 body of the item text.
6577 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6578 label width plus a little extra space.
6582 \begin_layout Labeling
6583 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6585 \begin_inset space ~
6588 width \SpecialChar LyX
6589 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6590 If the label width is larger, the label
6591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6598 into the first line.
6599 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6600 margin of the rest of the item text.
6603 \begin_layout Labeling
6604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 \begin_inset space ~
6609 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6614 environment has the same left margin.
6615 \begin_inset Newline newline
6618 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6623 \begin_inset space ~
6628 dialog (toolbar button
6631 arg "layout-paragraph"
6638 \begin_inset space ~
6643 determines the default label width.
6644 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6653 multiple times instead.
6654 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6664 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6667 \begin_inset space ~
6672 every time you alter a label in a
6677 \begin_inset Newline newline
6680 The predefined default width is the length of
6681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6689 \begin_inset space ~
6695 \begin_layout Standard
6700 list the same way as the
6704 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6710 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6719 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6720 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6722 \begin_inset space ~
6726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6728 reference "sec:Nesting"
6732 to learn about nesting.
6735 \begin_layout Standard
6736 There is yet another feature of the
6740 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6741 left-justifies the item labels by
6743 You can use additional
6747 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6748 justifies the item label.
6753 are documented in section
6754 \begin_inset space ~
6758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6760 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6765 Here are some examples:
6768 \begin_layout Labeling
6769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6770 Left The default for
6777 \begin_layout Labeling
6778 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6779 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6786 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6789 \begin_layout Labeling
6790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6791 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6795 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6802 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6805 \begin_layout Subsection
6807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6809 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6814 \begin_inset Index idx
6817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6826 \begin_layout Standard
6827 The features described in this section require that the module
6829 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6831 is loaded in the document settings.
6832 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6838 \begin_inset Index idx
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6852 Custom Enumerate Lists
6853 \begin_inset Index idx
6856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6857 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6865 \begin_layout Standard
6867 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6870 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6873 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6874 There you add the command
6877 \begin_layout Standard
6885 \begin_layout Standard
6897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6898 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6899 Code, look at section
6900 \begin_inset space ~
6904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6906 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6919 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6926 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6927 For capital Roman numerals replace
6939 in the command above.
6940 For Arabic numerals use
6948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6955 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6970 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6980 You can only number 26
6981 \begin_inset space ~
6984 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6993 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6994 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6997 \begin_layout Standard
6998 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7001 \begin_layout Enumerate
7002 \begin_inset Argument 1
7005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7031 \begin_layout Enumerate
7032 \begin_inset Argument 1
7035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Enumerate
7063 \begin_layout Enumerate
7064 \begin_inset Argument 1
7067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7091 \begin_layout Enumerate
7092 \begin_inset Argument 1
7095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7121 \begin_layout Standard
7122 For this list these commands were used:
7125 \begin_layout Standard
7136 \begin_inset Newline newline
7144 \begin_inset Newline newline
7152 \begin_inset Newline newline
7162 \begin_layout Standard
7169 makes the label emphasized and
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7179 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7187 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7188 lists until you change the definition.
7196 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7198 \begin_inset Index idx
7201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7202 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7210 \begin_layout Standard
7211 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7214 \begin_layout Enumerate
7215 \begin_inset Argument 1
7218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7237 \begin_inset Note Note
7240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7241 goes back to default numbering
7249 \begin_layout Enumerate
7253 \begin_layout Standard
7257 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7261 \begin_layout Standard
7262 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7267 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7268 to indicate that it is a resumed
7269 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7270 , but in the output.
7273 \begin_layout Standard
7274 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7282 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7291 \begin_layout Standard
7292 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7294 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7295 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7296 of a normal enumeration.
7297 There, insert the command
7300 \begin_layout Standard
7306 \begin_layout Standard
7311 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7315 \begin_layout Enumerate
7319 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 \begin_layout Standard
7324 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7327 \begin_layout Enumerate
7328 \begin_inset Argument 1
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7347 This enumeration starts at 4
7350 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7352 \begin_inset Index idx
7355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7367 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7370 \begin_layout Itemize
7374 \begin_layout Itemize
7375 with standard spacing
7378 \begin_layout Standard
7379 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7381 Add there the command
7385 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7388 \begin_layout Itemize
7389 \begin_inset Argument 1
7392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7411 \begin_layout Itemize
7415 \begin_layout Itemize
7419 \begin_layout Standard
7420 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7427 \begin_inset Index idx
7430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7438 For more information see its documentation,
7439 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7449 \begin_layout Standard
7450 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7452 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7453 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7457 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7460 \begin_layout Enumerate
7461 \begin_inset Argument 1
7464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7472 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7485 \begin_layout Enumerate
7486 with negative indentation
7489 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7490 Further Customization
7491 \begin_inset Index idx
7494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7495 Lists ! Customization
7503 \begin_layout Standard
7504 You can also change the style of description lists.
7508 \begin_layout Standard
7514 \begin_layout Standard
7515 changes the description label font, the command
7518 \begin_layout Standard
7524 \begin_layout Standard
7525 sets the list style.
7528 \begin_layout Standard
7529 An example where the command
7532 \begin_layout Standard
7537 itshape, style=nextline
7540 \begin_layout Standard
7544 \begin_layout Description
7546 \begin_inset space ~
7550 \begin_inset Argument 1
7553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7559 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7561 itshape, style=nextline
7571 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7572 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7576 \begin_layout Description
7578 \begin_inset space ~
7581 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7582 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7583 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7586 \begin_layout Standard
7587 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7593 \begin_inset Index idx
7596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7604 For more information see its documentation
7605 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7615 \begin_layout Subsection
7617 \begin_inset Index idx
7620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7631 \begin_inset space ~
7634 Address: An Overview
7637 \begin_layout Standard
7638 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7639 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7647 \begin_inset space ~
7653 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7654 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7655 gags on the document.
7656 In contrast, you can use the
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7668 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7669 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7674 Of course, you're not limited to using
7681 \begin_inset space ~
7690 \begin_inset space ~
7695 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7696 some European academic papers.
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7703 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7710 \begin_layout Standard
7715 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7716 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7720 \begin_inset space ~
7725 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7726 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7727 Here's an example of each:
7730 \begin_layout Right Address
7732 \begin_inset Newline newline
7736 \begin_inset Newline newline
7740 \begin_inset Newline newline
7743 When is it? What is today?
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7750 \begin_inset space ~
7756 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7758 the largest block of text on a single line.
7759 Here's an example of the
7766 \begin_layout Address
7768 \begin_inset Newline newline
7771 Where do I send this
7772 \begin_inset Newline newline
7775 Your post office and country
7778 \begin_layout Standard
7779 As you can see, both
7786 \begin_inset space ~
7791 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7796 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7797 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7803 This makes sense, since
7811 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7812 Thus, you have to use
7819 arg "newline-insert newline"
7824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7825 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7827 \begin_inset space ~
7831 \begin_inset space ~
7836 ) to start a new line in an
7843 \begin_inset space ~
7851 \begin_layout Subsection
7855 \begin_layout Standard
7856 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7857 or list of references.
7859 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7862 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7864 \begin_inset Index idx
7867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7876 \begin_layout Standard
7881 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7882 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7883 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7884 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7898 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7899 The book document classes ignores the
7903 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7907 in a letter document class.
7910 \begin_layout Standard
7915 environment does several things for you.
7916 First, it puts the centered label
7917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7925 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7927 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7928 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7929 the subsequent text.
7930 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7932 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7936 \begin_layout Standard
7937 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7941 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7942 The new paragraph will still be in the
7947 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7948 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7951 \begin_layout Standard
7952 \begin_inset Float figure
7959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7961 \begin_inset Graphics
7962 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7970 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7975 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7996 \begin_layout Standard
7997 We would love to demonstrate the
8001 environment, but since this document is in the
8002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8009 class, we can't do this.
8010 We inserted it therefore as figure
8011 \begin_inset space ~
8015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8017 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8022 If you have never heard of an
8023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8030 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8035 \begin_inset Index idx
8038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8047 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8054 \begin_layout Standard
8059 environment is used to list references.
8060 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8061 only use it at the end of the document.
8073 \begin_layout Standard
8074 When you first open a
8078 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8079 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8095 depending on the document class.
8096 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8097 Each paragraph of the
8101 environment is a bibliography entry.
8106 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8107 Each new paragraph is still in the
8114 \begin_layout Standard
8115 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8116 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8118 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8120 handling, have a look at section
8121 \begin_inset space ~
8125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8127 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8134 \begin_layout Subsection
8135 Special Environments
8138 \begin_layout Standard
8140 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8141 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8149 \begin_inset Index idx
8152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8162 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8169 \begin_layout Standard
8175 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8177 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8182 key as a fixed whitespace.
8186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8199 \begin_inset space ~
8204 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8222 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8225 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8228 arg "newline-insert newline"
8245 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8246 So, when you finish using the
8251 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8252 Also, you can nest the
8257 environment inside of others.
8260 \begin_layout Standard
8261 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8264 \begin_layout Itemize
8268 arg "newline-insert newline"
8271 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8276 \begin_inset space \space{}
8286 arg "newline-insert newline"
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8296 arg "newline-insert newline"
8306 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8312 \begin_layout Itemize
8313 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8314 You must put at least one
8318 in any line you want blank.
8319 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8328 since that will insert
8333 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8336 arg "self-insert \""
8342 \begin_layout Standard
8346 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8350 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8354 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8358 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8362 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8363 printf("Hello World!
8368 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8372 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8376 \begin_layout Standard
8377 This is just the standard
8378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8389 \begin_layout Standard
8395 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8397 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8398 as if you used a typewriter.
8399 \begin_inset Index idx
8402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8403 Paragraph environments|)
8408 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8411 Program Code Listings
8416 \begin_inset space ~
8424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8428 \begin_inset Index idx
8431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8440 \begin_layout Standard
8445 environment is similar to the
8450 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8451 computer console text.
8456 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8470 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8471 you can have empty lines.
8484 \begin_layout Itemize
8485 have a certain language and a text style
8488 \begin_layout Itemize
8489 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8490 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8491 and \SpecialChar TeX
8495 \begin_layout Standard
8496 Because of these properties
8500 works like a typewriter.
8504 \begin_layout Verbatim
8508 \begin_layout Verbatim
8511 The following 2 lines are empty:
8514 \begin_layout Verbatim
8518 \begin_layout Verbatim
8522 \begin_layout Verbatim
8523 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8528 \begin_layout Standard
8533 environment is identical to
8537 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8538 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8545 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8549 \begin_layout Section
8550 Nesting Environments
8551 \begin_inset Index idx
8554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8555 Nesting ! Environments
8561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8570 \begin_layout Subsection
8574 \begin_layout Standard
8576 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8578 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8580 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8582 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8594 \begin_layout Enumerate
8598 \begin_layout Enumerate
8603 \begin_layout Enumerate
8607 \begin_layout Enumerate
8612 \begin_layout Enumerate
8616 \begin_layout Standard
8617 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8618 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8622 \begin_inset space ~
8626 \begin_inset space ~
8634 \begin_inset space ~
8638 \begin_inset space ~
8643 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8645 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8648 arg "depth-increment"
8654 arg "depth-decrement"
8668 arg "depth-increment"
8674 arg "depth-decrement"
8678 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8679 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8683 \begin_layout Standard
8684 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8685 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8686 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8687 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8688 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8691 \begin_layout Standard
8692 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8694 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8696 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8699 \begin_layout Subsection
8700 What You Can and Can't Nest
8703 \begin_layout Standard
8704 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8705 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8708 \begin_layout Standard
8709 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8710 than a simple yes or no.
8711 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8715 Completely unnestable
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8719 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8728 \begin_layout Standard
8729 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8730 environments have them:
8733 \begin_layout Description
8734 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8735 Can't nest into them.
8739 \begin_layout Itemize
8745 \begin_layout Itemize
8751 \begin_layout Itemize
8757 \begin_layout Itemize
8763 \begin_layout Itemize
8770 \begin_layout Description
8772 \begin_inset space ~
8775 Nestable You can nest them.
8776 You can nest other things into them.
8780 \begin_layout Itemize
8786 \begin_layout Itemize
8792 \begin_layout Itemize
8798 \begin_layout Itemize
8804 \begin_layout Itemize
8810 \begin_layout Itemize
8816 \begin_layout Itemize
8822 \begin_layout Itemize
8829 \begin_layout Itemize
8835 \begin_layout Itemize
8842 \begin_layout Description
8843 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8844 You can't nest anything into them.
8848 \begin_layout Itemize
8854 \begin_layout Itemize
8860 \begin_layout Itemize
8866 \begin_layout Itemize
8872 \begin_layout Itemize
8878 \begin_layout Itemize
8884 \begin_layout Itemize
8890 \begin_layout Itemize
8896 \begin_layout Itemize
8902 \begin_layout Itemize
8908 \begin_layout Itemize
8914 \begin_layout Itemize
8920 \begin_layout Itemize
8926 \begin_layout Itemize
8930 \begin_inset space ~
8936 \begin_layout Itemize
8943 \begin_layout Standard
8944 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8952 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8962 \begin_inset space ~
8965 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8966 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8967 nested section headings violate this.
8975 \begin_layout Subsection
8976 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8977 \begin_inset Index idx
8980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8981 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8989 \begin_layout Standard
8990 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8991 affected by nesting anyhow.
8995 \begin_layout Itemize
8999 \begin_layout Itemize
9003 \begin_layout Itemize
9007 \begin_layout Standard
9009 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9017 Figures and tables in
9021 are not affected by this.
9026 Have a look at section
9027 \begin_inset space ~
9031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9033 reference "sec:Floats"
9037 for more information about
9044 \begin_layout Standard
9046 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9047 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9051 \begin_layout Standard
9052 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9060 of its own, it behaves just like a
9061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9068 paragraph environment.
9069 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9073 \begin_layout Standard
9074 Here's an example with a table:
9077 \begin_layout Enumerate
9082 \begin_layout Enumerate
9083 This is (a) and it's nested.
9087 \begin_layout Standard
9088 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9094 \begin_layout Standard
9096 \begin_inset Tabular
9097 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9098 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9099 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9100 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9184 \begin_layout Standard
9185 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9192 \begin_layout Enumerate
9194 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9198 \begin_layout Enumerate
9202 \begin_layout Standard
9203 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9206 \begin_layout Enumerate
9211 \begin_layout Enumerate
9212 This is (a) and it's nested.
9216 \begin_layout Standard
9217 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9223 \begin_layout Standard
9225 \begin_inset Tabular
9226 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9227 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9228 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9229 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9313 \begin_layout Standard
9314 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9320 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9330 \begin_layout Enumerate
9334 \begin_layout Standard
9335 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9339 \begin_layout Standard
9340 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9343 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9346 \begin_layout Enumerate
9351 \begin_layout Enumerate
9352 This is (a) and it's nested.
9355 \begin_layout Standard
9356 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9362 \begin_layout Standard
9364 \begin_inset Tabular
9365 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9366 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9367 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9453 \begin_layout Standard
9454 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9460 \begin_layout Enumerate
9462 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9469 \begin_layout Enumerate
9473 \begin_layout Standard
9474 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9480 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9481 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9485 \begin_layout Subsection
9486 Usage and General Features
9489 \begin_layout Standard
9490 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9491 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9500 is the innermost possible depth.
9501 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9504 \begin_layout Enumerate
9505 level #1 – outermost
9509 \begin_layout Enumerate
9514 \begin_layout Enumerate
9519 \begin_layout Enumerate
9524 \begin_layout Itemize
9529 \begin_layout Itemize
9538 \begin_layout Standard
9539 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9540 both of them in the example.
9541 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9551 For example, if we tried to nest another
9556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9563 , we would get errors.
9566 \begin_layout Subsection
9568 \begin_inset Index idx
9571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9580 \begin_layout Standard
9581 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9582 We have several examples of nested environments.
9583 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9587 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9588 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9591 \begin_layout Labeling
9592 \labelwidthstring MMM
9593 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9602 \begin_layout Labeling
9603 \labelwidthstring MMM
9604 #2-a This is level #2.
9605 We created it by using
9608 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9614 arg "depth-increment"
9621 \begin_layout Labeling
9622 \labelwidthstring MMM
9623 #3-a This is level #3.
9624 This time, we just enter
9631 arg "depth-increment"
9635 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9639 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9645 arg "depth-increment"
9652 \begin_layout Standard
9657 environment, nested inside of
9658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9666 So, it's at level #4.
9667 We did this by entering
9670 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9676 arg "depth-increment"
9679 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9684 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9700 \begin_layout Standard
9705 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9708 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9714 \begin_layout Labeling
9715 \labelwidthstring MMM
9716 #4-a This is level #4.
9720 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9723 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9728 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9732 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9737 keep nesting things inside
9738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9749 \begin_layout Labeling
9750 \labelwidthstring MMM
9751 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9756 \begin_layout Labeling
9757 \labelwidthstring MMM
9758 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9759 and this is level #6.
9760 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9764 \begin_layout Labeling
9765 \labelwidthstring MMM
9766 #5-b Back to level #5.
9770 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9776 arg "depth-decrement"
9783 \begin_layout Labeling
9784 \labelwidthstring MMM
9788 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9794 arg "depth-decrement"
9797 , we're back at level #4.
9801 \begin_layout Labeling
9802 \labelwidthstring MMM
9803 #3-b Back to level #3.
9804 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9808 \begin_layout Labeling
9809 \labelwidthstring MMM
9810 #2-b Back to level #2.
9815 \begin_layout Labeling
9816 \labelwidthstring MMM
9817 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9818 After this sentence, we will enter
9822 and change the paragraph environment back to
9829 \begin_layout Standard
9830 We could have also used the
9846 environment in place of the
9851 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9854 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9855 Example 2: Inheritance
9858 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9859 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9862 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9871 arg "depth-increment"
9875 \begin_inset Newline newline
9878 which, we will change to the
9886 \begin_layout Enumerate
9891 environment, at level #2.
9894 \begin_layout Enumerate
9895 Notice how the nested
9899 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9903 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9907 \begin_layout Standard
9908 We ended this example by entering
9913 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9917 and reset the nesting depth by using
9920 arg "depth-decrement"
9926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9927 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9936 \begin_inset Argument 1
9939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9940 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9948 \begin_layout Enumerate
9949 This is level #1, in an
9953 paragraph environment.
9954 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9963 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9969 arg "depth-increment"
9973 Now, what happens if we nest an
9977 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9978 label be? An asterisk?
9982 \begin_layout Itemize
9992 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9993 So, its label is a bullet.
9994 (We got here by using
9997 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10003 arg "depth-increment"
10006 , then changing the environment to
10014 \begin_layout Itemize
10015 Here's level #4, produced using
10018 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10024 arg "depth-increment"
10028 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10033 \begin_layout Enumerate
10035 to get to level #5.
10036 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10041 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10045 , because we are in the
10053 environment (that is, it is an
10068 \begin_layout Enumerate
10073 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10074 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10078 \begin_layout Enumerate
10079 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10082 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10085 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10088 \begin_layout Enumerate
10092 arg "depth-decrement"
10095 to decrease the depth after the next
10098 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10105 \begin_layout Enumerate
10107 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10112 \begin_layout Enumerate
10114 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10115 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10119 \begin_layout Enumerate
10120 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10129 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10134 reset the counter for the label.
10138 \begin_layout Enumerate
10142 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10148 arg "depth-decrement"
10151 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10152 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10153 into the twofold-nested
10161 \begin_layout Enumerate
10162 The same thing happens if we do another
10165 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10171 arg "depth-decrement"
10174 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10177 \begin_layout Standard
10178 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10183 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10194 The number of other
10198 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10205 The same rule applies for the
10209 environment, as well.
10212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10213 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10216 \begin_layout Enumerate
10217 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10218 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10219 the same detail with how we did it.
10228 \begin_layout Standard
10236 arg "depth-increment"
10243 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10244 the example in parentheses someplace.
10245 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10246 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10247 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10251 \begin_layout Enumerate
10256 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10260 \begin_layout Verse
10261 Now we will add verse.
10262 \begin_inset Newline newline
10265 It will get much worse.
10266 \begin_inset Newline newline
10276 arg "depth-increment"
10286 \begin_layout Verse
10287 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10288 \begin_inset Newline newline
10291 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10292 \begin_inset Newline newline
10298 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10306 \begin_layout Verse
10307 Here comes a table:
10311 \begin_layout Standard
10312 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10318 \begin_layout Standard
10320 \begin_inset Tabular
10321 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10322 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10323 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10324 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10409 \begin_layout Verse
10413 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10423 arg "depth-increment"
10429 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10435 \begin_inset Newline newline
10443 arg "depth-decrement"
10450 \begin_layout Enumerate
10455 : level #1) This is another item.
10456 Note that selecting a
10460 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10461 3 times to put the table inside the
10469 \begin_layout Quotation
10470 We're now ending the
10474 list and changing to
10479 We're still at level #1.
10480 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10481 The next set of paragraphs is a
10482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10489 We will nest both the
10496 \begin_inset space ~
10501 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10505 for the letter body.
10509 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10512 to preserve the depth.
10513 Remember that you need to use
10516 arg "newline-insert newline"
10519 to create multiple lines inside the
10526 \begin_inset space ~
10536 \begin_layout Right Address
10538 \begin_inset Newline newline
10541 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10542 \begin_inset Newline newline
10548 \begin_layout Address
10550 \begin_inset space ~
10556 \begin_layout Quotation
10557 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10561 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10562 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10563 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10564 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10565 as soon as possible.
10566 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10569 \begin_layout Quotation
10570 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10571 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10572 with your order, along with payment.
10575 \begin_layout Quotation
10576 We thank you again for your patience.
10579 \begin_layout Address
10581 \begin_inset Newline newline
10588 \begin_layout Quotation
10589 That ends that example!
10592 \begin_layout Standard
10593 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10594 gives you a lot of power with just
10596 We could have easily nested an
10617 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10620 \begin_layout Subsection
10622 \begin_inset Index idx
10625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10626 Nesting ! Separation
10632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10634 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10641 \begin_layout Standard
10642 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10644 For example you need two different enumerations:
10647 \begin_layout Enumerate
10652 \begin_layout Enumerate
10657 \begin_layout Enumerate
10661 \begin_layout Standard
10662 \begin_inset Separator plain
10668 \begin_layout Itemize
10674 \begin_layout Standard
10675 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10681 \begin_layout Enumerate
10685 \begin_layout Enumerate
10689 \begin_layout Enumerate
10693 \begin_layout Standard
10694 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10695 list item and use the menu
10697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10698 Separated <Name> Above
10702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10703 Separated <Name> Below
10706 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10707 ) and before or behind it the
10709 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10712 \begin_layout Standard
10713 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10714 (red arrow in LyX).
10715 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10716 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10719 \begin_layout Standard
10720 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10723 arg "paragraph-break"
10730 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10733 \begin_layout Section
10734 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10735 \begin_inset Index idx
10738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10747 \begin_layout Standard
10748 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10749 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10751 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10752 be broken at the end of a line.
10753 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10757 \begin_layout Subsection
10759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10761 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10766 \begin_inset Index idx
10769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10778 \begin_layout Standard
10779 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10780 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10781 ) not to break the line at
10783 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10786 \begin_layout Quote
10787 Further documentation is given in section
10788 \begin_inset Newline newline
10792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10794 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10802 \begin_layout Standard
10803 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10818 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10827 A protected space is set with
10829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10830 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10832 \begin_inset space ~
10840 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10846 \begin_layout Subsection
10848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10850 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10855 \begin_inset Index idx
10858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10859 Spacing ! Horizontal
10867 \begin_layout Standard
10868 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10870 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10871 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10875 The length units are listed in Appendix
10876 \begin_inset space ~
10880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10882 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10893 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10898 \begin_inset Index idx
10901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10902 Spaces ! Inter-word
10910 \begin_layout Standard
10911 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10912 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10913 at the ends of sentences.
10914 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10915 automatically takes care about this.
10916 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10917 followed by a period; see section
10918 \begin_inset space ~
10922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10924 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10929 To insert a normal space, select
10931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10932 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10934 \begin_inset space ~
10942 arg "space-insert normal"
10948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10952 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10957 \begin_inset Index idx
10960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10969 \begin_layout Standard
10971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10978 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10987 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10988 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10989 inside abbreviations:
10992 \begin_layout Quote
10994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10998 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11001 \begin_layout Standard
11002 or between values and units.
11003 Compare for example this:
11004 \begin_inset Newline newline
11008 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11012 \begin_inset Newline newline
11015 10 kg (normal space
11018 \begin_layout Standard
11019 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11021 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11022 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11024 \begin_inset space ~
11032 arg "space-insert thin"
11038 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11042 \begin_layout Standard
11043 You can also insert the following space types:
11046 \begin_layout Description
11048 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11050 \begin_inset space ~
11056 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11060 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11064 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11068 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11070 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11073 space between the arrows.
11074 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11078 \begin_layout Description
11080 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11082 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11086 \begin_inset space ~
11089 space A line with a
11090 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11094 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11098 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11102 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11104 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11107 space between the arrows.
11110 \begin_layout Description
11112 \begin_inset space ~
11116 \begin_inset space ~
11119 space A line with a
11120 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11124 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11128 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11131 negative thin space between the arrows.
11134 \begin_layout Description
11136 \begin_inset space ~
11140 \begin_inset space ~
11143 space A line with a
11144 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11148 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11152 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11155 negative medium space between the arrows.
11158 \begin_layout Description
11160 \begin_inset space ~
11164 \begin_inset space ~
11167 space A line with a
11168 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11172 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11176 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11179 negative thick space between the arrows.
11182 \begin_layout Description
11184 \begin_inset space ~
11188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11192 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11196 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11200 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11204 \begin_inset space ~
11208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11211 em) space between the arrows.
11214 \begin_layout Description
11216 \begin_inset space ~
11220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11224 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11228 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11232 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11236 \begin_inset space ~
11240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11243 em) space between the arrows.
11246 \begin_layout Description
11248 \begin_inset space ~
11252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11256 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11260 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11264 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11268 \begin_inset space ~
11272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 em) space between the arrows.
11278 \begin_layout Description
11280 \begin_inset space ~
11284 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11288 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11293 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11300 cm space between the arrows.
11303 \begin_layout Standard
11305 \begin_inset space ~
11309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11311 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11315 lists the different space sizes.
11318 \begin_layout Standard
11319 \begin_inset Float table
11326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11327 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11332 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11336 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11346 \begin_inset Tabular
11347 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11348 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11349 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11447 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11453 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11464 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11475 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11481 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11492 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11522 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11602 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11679 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11681 \begin_inset Index idx
11684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11693 \begin_layout Standard
11694 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11695 feature for adding extra space
11696 in a uniform fashion.
11697 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11698 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11699 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11700 equally between themselves.
11703 \begin_layout Standard
11704 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11707 \begin_layout Quote
11709 This is on the left side
11710 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11713 This is on the right
11716 \begin_layout Quote
11719 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11723 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11729 \begin_layout Quote
11732 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11736 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11740 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11746 \begin_layout Standard
11747 That was an example in the
11753 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11757 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11761 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11764 is one in a standard paragraph.
11765 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11769 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11772 \begin_layout Standard
11773 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11776 \begin_inset space ~
11781 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11784 \begin_layout Standard
11786 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11790 \begin_inset space ~
11796 \begin_layout Standard
11798 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11802 \begin_inset space ~
11808 \begin_layout Standard
11810 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11814 \begin_inset space ~
11820 \begin_layout Standard
11822 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11826 \begin_inset space ~
11832 \begin_layout Standard
11834 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
11836 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
11840 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
11841 (= opened downwards)
11844 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11848 \begin_inset space ~
11854 \begin_layout Standard
11856 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
11858 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
11862 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
11866 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11870 \begin_inset space ~
11876 \begin_layout Standard
11877 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11885 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11889 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11891 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11892 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11896 option in the space dialog.
11904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11908 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11913 \begin_inset Index idx
11916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11925 \begin_layout Standard
11926 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11927 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11930 \begin_layout Standard
11931 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11934 What is correct English?:
11935 \begin_inset Newline newline
11939 \begin_inset Newline newline
11943 \begin_inset space ~
11946 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11947 \begin_inset Newline newline
11951 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11962 \begin_inset Newline newline
11966 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11977 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11983 \begin_layout Standard
11985 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11990 \begin_inset space ~
11994 \begin_inset space ~
11998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12002 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12005 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12009 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12015 \begin_inset space ~
12019 \begin_inset space ~
12023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12026 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12035 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12036 That is why it is named
12037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12045 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12046 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12050 \begin_layout Subsection
12052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12054 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12059 \begin_inset Index idx
12062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12071 \begin_layout Standard
12072 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12074 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12075 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12077 \begin_inset space ~
12083 There you find the following sizes:
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12099 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12100 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12105 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12108 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12110 \begin_inset space ~
12116 \begin_inset Index idx
12119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12120 Document ! Settings
12125 for the paragraph separation.
12126 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12135 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12139 \begin_layout Standard
12141 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12150 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12151 size including line spacing.
12156 \begin_layout Standard
12162 \begin_inset Index idx
12165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12171 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12172 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12177 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12178 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12187 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12196 s are described in section
12197 \begin_inset space ~
12201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12203 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12212 If there are several
12216 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12217 You can therefore use
12221 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12224 \begin_layout Standard
12229 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12230 \begin_inset space ~
12234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12236 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12243 \begin_layout Standard
12244 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12254 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12255 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12267 \begin_layout Subsection
12268 Paragraph Alignment
12269 \begin_inset Index idx
12272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12273 Paragraph ! Alignment
12281 \begin_layout Standard
12282 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12284 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12287 dialog (toolbar button
12290 arg "layout-paragraph"
12294 There are five possibilities:
12297 \begin_layout Itemize
12305 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12311 \begin_layout Itemize
12319 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12325 \begin_layout Itemize
12333 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12339 \begin_layout Itemize
12347 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12353 \begin_layout Itemize
12361 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12367 \begin_layout Standard
12368 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12369 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12370 the left and right margins.
12371 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12374 \begin_layout Standard
12376 This paragraph is right aligned,
12379 \begin_layout Standard
12381 this one is centered,
12384 \begin_layout Standard
12386 this one is left aligned.
12389 \begin_layout Subsection
12391 \begin_inset Index idx
12394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12395 Page breaks ! Forced
12401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12403 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12410 \begin_layout Standard
12411 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12412 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12413 force a page break where you want one.
12414 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12415 is good at page breaking.
12416 Only if you use a lot of
12420 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12421 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12424 \begin_layout Standard
12425 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12426 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12430 have to change the page breaking.
12433 \begin_layout Standard
12434 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12436 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12438 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12439 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12441 \begin_inset space ~
12447 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12450 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12452 \begin_inset space ~
12457 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12459 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12460 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12463 \begin_layout Standard
12464 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12465 at the top of a page.
12466 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12468 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12469 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12470 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12474 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12478 to learn more about
12485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12489 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12494 \begin_inset Index idx
12497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12498 Page breaks ! Clear
12506 \begin_layout Standard
12507 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12508 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12509 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12510 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12511 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12514 \begin_layout Standard
12515 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12518 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12520 \begin_inset space ~
12526 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12529 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12531 \begin_inset space ~
12535 \begin_inset space ~
12540 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12541 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12544 \begin_layout Subsection
12546 \begin_inset Index idx
12549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12558 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12565 \begin_layout Standard
12566 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12568 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12571 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12573 \begin_inset space ~
12577 \begin_inset space ~
12585 arg "newline-insert newline"
12589 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12592 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12594 \begin_inset space ~
12598 \begin_inset space ~
12606 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12609 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12611 This is useful to avoid
12612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12619 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12622 \begin_layout Standard
12623 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12624 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12626 very good at line breaking.
12627 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12628 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12629 \begin_inset space ~
12633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12635 reference "sec:Quote"
12640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12642 reference "sec:Verse"
12647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12649 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12656 \begin_layout Subsection
12658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12660 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12665 \begin_inset Index idx
12668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12677 \begin_layout Standard
12679 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12690 \begin_layout Standard
12694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12695 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12697 \begin_inset space ~
12702 you can insert horizontal lines.
12703 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12704 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12705 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12708 \begin_layout Standard
12710 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12721 \begin_layout Section
12722 Characters and Symbols
12725 \begin_layout Standard
12726 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12727 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12728 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12736 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12740 for information on how this is done.
12743 \begin_layout Standard
12744 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12749 dialog via the menu
12751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12752 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12758 \begin_layout Standard
12759 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12767 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12768 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12770 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12778 \begin_layout Section
12779 Fonts and Text Styles
12780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12782 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12789 \begin_layout Subsection
12791 \begin_inset Index idx
12794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12803 \begin_layout Standard
12804 There are two types of fonts:
12807 \begin_layout Description
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12813 \begin_inset Index idx
12816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12822 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12827 characters) in the font.
12828 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12829 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12830 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12831 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12832 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12833 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12834 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12835 \begin_inset Newline newline
12838 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12839 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12840 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12841 sizes than at small ones.
12842 \begin_inset Newline newline
12856 \begin_inset space ~
12864 \begin_layout Description
12866 \begin_inset space ~
12870 \begin_inset Index idx
12873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12879 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12880 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12881 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12882 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12883 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12884 image manipulation program.
12885 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12886 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12887 \begin_inset space ~
12890 pixels high up to 34
12891 \begin_inset space ~
12894 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12895 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12896 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12898 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12899 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12900 \begin_inset Newline newline
12903 Bitmap fonts are named
12906 \begin_inset space ~
12911 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12914 \begin_layout Standard
12915 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12916 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12917 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12918 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12919 use scalable fonts.
12922 \begin_layout Standard
12923 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12926 \begin_layout Standard
12927 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12929 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12931 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12934 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12935 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12936 font to emphasize text, you use an
12937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12945 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12947 In \SpecialChar LyX
12948 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12952 \begin_layout Subsection
12955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12957 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12964 \begin_layout Standard
12965 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12966 used its own fonts.
12967 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12968 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12971 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12972 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12973 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12974 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12975 to a word processor.
12976 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12977 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12978 files are very portable across
12979 different machines.
12980 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12981 has increased a lot
12982 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12985 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12987 \begin_inset space ~
12991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12993 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12998 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12999 code in the document
13000 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13003 \begin_layout Standard
13004 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13005 engines that are also able directly
13006 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13008 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13010 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13012 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13013 that is installed on your system.
13014 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13017 \begin_layout Standard
13018 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13026 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13027 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13035 \begin_layout Subsection
13036 Document Font and Font size
13037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13039 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13044 \begin_inset Index idx
13047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13054 \begin_inset Index idx
13057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13066 \begin_layout Standard
13067 You can set the document fonts in the
13069 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13073 \begin_inset Index idx
13076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13077 Document ! Settings
13087 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13088 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13091 \begin_inset space ~
13100 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13102 \begin_inset space ~
13105 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13108 \begin_layout Standard
13113 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13114 This requires that you use
13126 as the output format, i.
13127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13131 \begin_inset space \space{}
13134 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13135 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13136 installed (see section
13137 \begin_inset space ~
13141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13143 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13148 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13150 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13151 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13153 \begin_inset space ~
13156 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13157 cannot determine the family.
13158 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13159 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13162 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13165 \begin_layout Standard
13166 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13167 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13172 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13178 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13180 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13182 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13185 font encoding, this is
13186 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13187 , depending on the document language,
13190 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13191 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13199 \begin_inset space ~
13205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13215 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13216 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13224 \begin_inset space ~
13230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13238 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13259 European Computer Modern
13262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13270 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13273 \begin_layout Standard
13278 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13279 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13284 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13287 \begin_inset space ~
13292 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13298 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13299 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13302 \begin_layout Itemize
13306 \begin_inset space ~
13311 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13324 \begin_inset space ~
13329 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13330 community in order to replace
13334 as the default font.
13335 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13336 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13339 \begin_inset space ~
13352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13353 One difference is improved kerning.
13361 \begin_layout Itemize
13362 If you do not like the look of
13370 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13375 \begin_inset space ~
13381 \begin_inset space ~
13391 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13392 \begin_inset space ~
13395 serif and typewriter fonts,
13399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13400 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13407 \begin_inset space ~
13416 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13421 \begin_inset space \space{}
13429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13433 \begin_inset space \space{}
13439 \begin_inset space ~
13447 \begin_inset space ~
13457 but you can also select your own.
13458 \begin_inset Newline newline
13461 The differences between roman,
13464 \begin_inset space ~
13473 fonts are explained in section
13474 \begin_inset space ~
13478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13480 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13485 \begin_inset Newline newline
13491 \begin_inset space ~
13496 was originally designed for newspapers.
13497 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13498 into the small newspaper columns.
13502 \begin_inset space ~
13507 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13510 \begin_layout Standard
13511 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13524 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13529 depends on the class you are using.
13530 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13533 \begin_layout Standard
13534 Note that the font size is the
13539 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13540 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13541 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13542 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13545 \begin_inset space ~
13551 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13552 \begin_inset space ~
13556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13558 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13565 \begin_layout Standard
13569 \begin_inset space ~
13574 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13576 \begin_inset space ~
13579 serif or typewriter.
13584 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13594 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13597 \begin_layout Standard
13602 LaTeX font encoding
13604 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13605 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13611 \begin_inset Index idx
13614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13622 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13624 \begin_inset space ~
13628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13630 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13637 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13638 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13639 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13643 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13651 \begin_layout Standard
13652 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13654 Use Old Style Figures
13658 Use True Small Caps
13661 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13664 Use Old Style Figures
13666 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13668 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13676 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13680 Use True Small Caps
13682 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13683 of scaled capitals.
13684 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13685 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13686 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13690 \begin_layout Standard
13692 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13693 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13694 provided by the font package (or the
13698 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13703 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13709 \begin_layout Standard
13714 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13715 a font to display the script characters.
13719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13720 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13726 \begin_inset Index idx
13729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13736 So this has no effect for the document language
13752 \begin_layout Standard
13755 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13757 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13758 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13764 \begin_inset Index idx
13767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13769 packages ! microtype
13778 \begin_layout Standard
13781 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13783 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13788 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13789 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13795 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13796 \begin_inset space ~
13800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13802 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13812 \begin_layout Standard
13813 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13817 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13825 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13830 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13831 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13833 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13835 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13838 dialog, see section
13839 \begin_inset space ~
13843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13845 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13857 \begin_layout Subsection
13861 \begin_layout Standard
13862 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13863 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13865 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13866 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13867 choose a math font in the dialog
13869 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13873 \begin_inset Index idx
13876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13877 Document ! Settings
13883 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13884 automatically selects a math font.
13885 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13886 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13895 \begin_inset space ~
13901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13906 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13907 document font is available.
13910 \begin_layout Standard
13911 Note that the math font will not be used for
13915 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13921 or by the insertion of the command
13928 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13929 \begin_inset space ~
13933 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13934 while the math characters do not.
13936 \begin_inset space ~
13939 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13942 \begin_inset space ~
13950 \begin_inset space ~
13955 in the document font settings.
13958 \begin_layout Standard
13959 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13960 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13961 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13962 font (in most cases
13963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13969 \begin_inset space ~
13975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13978 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13979 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13987 \begin_inset space ~
13993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13999 \begin_layout Subsection
14001 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14003 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14007 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14011 name "subsec:charstyles"
14018 \begin_inset Index idx
14021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14028 \begin_inset Index idx
14031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14040 \begin_layout Standard
14041 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14042 automatically changes the
14043 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14046 style for certain paragraph environments.
14048 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14049 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14051 This is where we meet the concept of
14057 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14059 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14063 \begin_layout Standard
14065 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14070 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14085 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14094 e., available with all document classes.
14095 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14099 for specific purposes.
14100 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14103 \begin_layout Standard
14105 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14106 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14116 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14120 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14133 — you customized the
14138 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14139 among them, encourage the use of
14151 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14152 \begin_inset space ~
14156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14158 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14163 Rather than fiddling with
14167 , they encourage the use of
14171 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14176 \begin_inset Quotes els
14180 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14183 ), not their form (
14184 \begin_inset Quotes els
14188 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14192 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14193 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14194 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14195 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14196 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14197 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14203 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14207 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14208 With a semantic markup (such as
14212 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14217 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14219 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14220 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14223 \begin_layout Standard
14225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14226 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14227 by \SpecialChar LyX
14233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14235 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14236 Builtin Text Styles
14237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14239 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14246 \begin_layout Standard
14248 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14249 The two builtin text styles can be
14250 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14254 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14258 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14259 both of these styles
14262 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14270 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14276 \begin_layout Standard
14281 style, do one of the following:
14284 \begin_layout Itemize
14285 click on the toolbar button
14294 \begin_layout Itemize
14295 use the key binding
14302 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14306 \begin_layout Itemize
14308 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14316 arg "dialog-show character"
14322 arg "dialog-show character"
14325 ) as described in section
14326 \begin_inset space ~
14330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14332 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14341 \begin_layout Standard
14342 These commands are all toggles.
14347 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14350 \begin_layout Standard
14351 One typically uses the
14355 style for proper names.
14357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14364 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14370 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14374 \begin_layout Standard
14376 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14381 is producing text in
14385 , but the definition can be changed.
14390 \begin_layout Standard
14392 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14394 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14402 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14409 \begin_layout Itemize
14410 clicking on the toolbar button
14419 \begin_layout Itemize
14420 using the keybindings
14427 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14431 \begin_layout Itemize
14433 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14441 arg "dialog-show character"
14447 arg "dialog-show character"
14450 ) as described in section
14451 \begin_inset space ~
14455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14457 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14466 \begin_layout Standard
14471 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14473 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14475 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14478 packages use a different font
14479 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14480 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14486 \begin_layout Standard
14487 We've been using the
14491 style all over the place in this document.
14492 Here's one more example:
14495 \begin_layout Quotation
14499 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14501 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14507 \begin_layout Standard
14508 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14509 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14510 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14511 the common tendency to overuse
14512 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14514 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14519 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14523 \begin_layout Standard
14525 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14526 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14527 only as font changes and integrated in the
14535 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14538 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14545 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14551 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14554 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14556 \begin_inset space ~
14559 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14561 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14567 arg "dialog-show character"
14573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14575 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14581 arg "dialog-show character"
14585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14591 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14595 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14602 \begin_layout Standard
14604 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14605 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14607 \begin_inset space ~
14611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14613 reference "subsec:Modules"
14620 ), or local layout settings (see section
14621 \begin_inset space ~
14625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14627 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14632 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14636 markup for specific functions.
14637 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14642 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14652 \begin_inset Quotes els
14656 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14662 \begin_layout Standard
14664 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14665 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14667 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14673 \begin_layout Standard
14675 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14676 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14681 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14682 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14683 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14688 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14689 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14694 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14702 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14703 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14704 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14705 \begin_inset Flex Code
14708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14710 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14719 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14733 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14738 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14747 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14748 on screen their formal appearance.
14753 \begin_layout Subsection
14755 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14757 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14761 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14767 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14769 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14775 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14777 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14783 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14788 \begin_inset Index idx
14791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14800 \begin_layout Standard
14801 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14802 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14805 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14807 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14809 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14813 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14814 the properties of text passages
14815 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14819 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14820 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14821 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14822 from ordinary dialog.
14823 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14827 \begin_layout Standard
14829 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14830 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14831 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14832 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14833 the properties of the respective text passages.
14838 comes in as a last resort.
14843 \begin_layout Standard
14844 Before we document how to
14845 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14846 use custom character style
14847 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14848 tweak the text properties
14850 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14851 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14853 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14857 \begin_inset Newline newline
14860 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14861 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14864 \begin_layout Standard
14866 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14867 use custom character styles
14868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14869 tweak text properties
14872 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14875 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14877 \begin_inset space ~
14880 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14882 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14888 arg "dialog-show character"
14893 dialog or press the toolbar button
14896 arg "dialog-show character"
14901 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14904 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14905 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14907 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14910 property that you can choose.
14911 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14914 \begin_inset space ~
14919 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14921 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14927 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14932 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14933 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14934 environments all at once.
14937 \begin_layout Standard
14939 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14941 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14944 properties, and their options (in addition to
14947 \begin_inset space ~
14953 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14957 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14965 \begin_layout Labeling
14966 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14980 The possible options are:
14984 \begin_layout Labeling
14985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14990 This is the Roman font family.
14991 Normally a serif font.
14992 It's also the default family.
15002 \begin_layout Labeling
15003 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15007 \begin_inset space ~
15014 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15026 \begin_layout Labeling
15027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15034 This is the Typewriter font family.
15040 arg "font-typewriter"
15046 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15050 \begin_layout Standard
15052 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15053 The general differences of these families are:
15056 \begin_layout Itemize
15058 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15063 fonts use characters with serifs.
15064 These are the small
15065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15072 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15073 The following example shows the difference:
15074 \begin_inset Newline newline
15078 \begin_inset Newline newline
15083 text without serifs
15086 \begin_inset Newline newline
15089 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15090 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15097 \begin_layout Itemize
15099 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15104 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15105 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15106 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15109 \begin_layout Itemize
15111 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15124 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15142 \begin_inset Newline newline
15146 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15151 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15164 \begin_inset Note Note
15167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15169 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15170 For more on phantoms see section
15171 \begin_inset space ~
15175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15177 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15187 \begin_inset Newline newline
15196 \begin_layout Labeling
15197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15202 This corresponds to the print weight.
15207 \begin_layout Labeling
15208 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15213 This is the Medium font series.
15214 It's also the default series.
15217 \begin_layout Labeling
15218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15225 This is the Bold font series.
15238 \begin_layout Labeling
15239 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15244 As the name implies.
15249 \begin_layout Labeling
15250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15255 This is the Upright font shape.
15256 It's also the default shape.
15259 \begin_layout Labeling
15260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15270 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15275 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15280 s the Italic font shape
15286 \begin_layout Labeling
15287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15294 This is the Slanted font shape
15296 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15297 , this is different from italic).
15300 \begin_layout Labeling
15301 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15305 \begin_inset space ~
15312 This is the Small caps font shape
15319 \begin_layout Labeling
15320 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15325 Alters the text color.
15326 Note that not all DVI
15327 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15329 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15332 viewers are able to display colors.
15334 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15338 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15340 \begin_inset space ~
15347 , which means that the document default color set in
15349 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15350 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15356 \begin_inset space ~
15362 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15364 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15368 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15448 \begin_inset Index idx
15451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15460 \begin_layout Labeling
15461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15466 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15467 the language of the document.
15468 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15469 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15470 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15473 in blue to indicate the change
15474 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15475 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15479 \begin_inset Newline newline
15482 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15484 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15485 When using the spell checking (see section
15486 \begin_inset space ~
15490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15492 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15496 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15497 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15499 \begin_inset Newline newline
15502 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15504 Exclude from Spellchecking
15507 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15510 \begin_layout Labeling
15511 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15516 Alters the size of the font.
15518 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15520 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15524 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15527 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15528 document font size.
15529 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15530 the details, but a general description of what
15536 \begin_layout Labeling
15537 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15558 arg "font-size tiny"
15564 \begin_layout Labeling
15565 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15586 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15592 \begin_layout Labeling
15593 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15614 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15620 \begin_layout Labeling
15621 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15642 arg "font-size small"
15648 \begin_layout Labeling
15649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15663 It's also the default size.
15667 arg "font-size normal"
15673 \begin_layout Labeling
15674 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15695 arg "font-size large"
15701 \begin_layout Labeling
15702 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15723 arg "font-size larger"
15729 \begin_layout Labeling
15730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15751 arg "font-size largest"
15757 \begin_layout Labeling
15758 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15779 arg "font-size huge"
15785 \begin_layout Labeling
15786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15807 arg "font-size giant"
15813 \begin_layout Labeling
15814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15819 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15839 arg "font-size increase"
15845 \begin_layout Labeling
15846 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15851 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15871 arg "font-size decrease"
15878 \begin_layout Standard
15883 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15884 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15886 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15887 — use those instead.
15888 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15891 \begin_layout Labeling
15892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15894 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15898 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15904 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15905 change a few other things at the character level
15906 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15907 have text passages being underlined
15911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15912 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15913 days, when you could not change fonts.
15914 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15915 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15916 because some people
15920 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15927 \begin_layout Labeling
15928 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15930 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15937 This is text with emphasize on
15940 This might seem like the same as
15944 , but it is actually a bit different.
15950 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15952 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15953 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15957 \begin_layout Labeling
15958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15960 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15965 Don't use underlining.
15970 \begin_layout Labeling
15971 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15973 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15985 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15987 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15996 arg "font-underline"
16002 \begin_inset Newline newline
16006 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16009 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16010 when you could not change fonts.
16011 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16012 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16013 because some people
16017 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16022 \begin_layout Labeling
16023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16027 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16029 \begin_inset space ~
16038 This is text with Double under
16039 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16041 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16050 arg "font-underunderline"
16054 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16056 \begin_inset Newline newline
16059 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16060 about double underbar
16065 \begin_layout Labeling
16066 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16070 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16072 \begin_inset space ~
16081 This is text with Wavy under
16082 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16084 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16093 arg "font-underwave"
16097 \begin_inset Newline newline
16100 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16101 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16102 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16107 \begin_layout Labeling
16108 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16110 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16115 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16121 \begin_layout Labeling
16122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16124 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16129 Don't use strikethrough.
16132 \begin_layout Labeling
16133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16137 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16139 \begin_inset space ~
16143 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16154 Single strikethrough
16162 arg "font-strikeout"
16166 \begin_inset Newline newline
16169 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16170 changed in the meantime.
16173 \begin_layout Labeling
16174 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16176 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16180 \begin_inset space ~
16184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16186 \begin_inset space ~
16190 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16198 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16200 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16206 \begin_inset Newline newline
16209 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16213 \begin_layout Standard
16215 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16216 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16217 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16218 \begin_inset space ~
16222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16224 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16231 \begin_layout Itemize
16233 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16240 This is text with emphasize on
16245 \begin_layout Itemize
16249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16256 This is text with Noun on.
16258 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16265 , this is a logical attribute.
16266 Normally it's equivalent to
16269 \begin_inset space ~
16279 \begin_layout Standard
16280 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16281 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16283 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16288 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16289 chosen a new character style
16290 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16291 applied a text property
16294 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16297 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16299 \begin_inset space ~
16302 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16304 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16310 arg "dialog-show character"
16318 arg "dialog-show character"
16321 ) dialog, the settings are
16322 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16326 You can activate the
16327 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16329 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16330 last applied properties
16332 by using the toolbar button
16335 arg "textstyle-apply"
16339 The button lets you apply
16340 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16341 your custom character style
16342 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16345 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16347 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16348 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16349 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16350 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16355 \begin_layout Standard
16356 To completely reset the
16357 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16359 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16360 text properties of a selection
16362 to the default, use
16363 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16365 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16375 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16380 from the menu of the toolbar button
16383 arg "textstyle-apply"
16390 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16391 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16392 you just set the shape to
16393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16411 \begin_inset space ~
16425 \begin_layout Standard
16427 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16428 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16436 \begin_inset space ~
16448 \begin_layout Itemize
16450 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16463 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16481 \begin_inset Newline newline
16485 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16499 \begin_inset Note Note
16502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16503 For more on phantoms see section
16504 \begin_inset space ~
16508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16510 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16520 \begin_inset Newline newline
16526 \begin_layout Itemize
16528 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16533 fonts use characters with serifs.
16534 These are the small
16535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16542 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16543 The following example shows the difference:
16544 \begin_inset Newline newline
16548 \begin_inset Newline newline
16553 text without serifs
16556 \begin_inset Newline newline
16559 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16560 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16567 \begin_layout Itemize
16569 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16574 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16575 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16576 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16581 \begin_layout Standard
16583 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16591 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16592 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16595 \begin_inset space ~
16600 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16601 the property to be removed.
16602 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16603 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16604 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16622 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16623 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16631 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16635 \begin_inset space ~
16640 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16651 If you, for example, set
16652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16670 \begin_inset space ~
16675 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16684 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16689 \begin_layout Standard
16691 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16694 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16695 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16698 \begin_layout Section
16699 Printing and Previewing
16702 \begin_layout Subsection
16706 \begin_layout Standard
16707 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16708 using \SpecialChar LyX
16709 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16710 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16711 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16712 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16714 Additional Features
16719 \begin_layout Standard
16721 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16724 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16725 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16726 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16729 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16730 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16731 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16732 to turn your writing into printable output.
16733 This happens in two stages:
16736 \begin_layout Enumerate
16737 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16738 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16740 a file with the extension,
16741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16755 \begin_layout Enumerate
16756 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16757 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16758 to use the commands in the
16762 file to produce printable output.
16765 \begin_layout Subsection
16766 Output file formats
16767 \begin_inset Index idx
16770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16779 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16787 Simple text (ASCII)
16788 \begin_inset Index idx
16791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16792 File formats ! ASCII
16800 \begin_layout Standard
16801 This file type has the extension
16802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16814 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16818 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16825 \begin_layout Standard
16826 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16828 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16829 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16831 \begin_inset space ~
16837 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16838 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16839 bibliography (section
16840 \begin_inset space ~
16844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16846 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16851 If your document includes such material, use
16853 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16854 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16856 \begin_inset space ~
16860 \begin_inset space ~
16864 \begin_inset space ~
16872 \begin_inset space ~
16876 \begin_inset space ~
16882 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16883 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16886 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16889 \begin_inset Index idx
16892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16893 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16902 \begin_layout Standard
16903 This file type has the extension
16904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16915 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16918 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16919 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16920 -Errors or to process it manually
16921 with console commands.
16922 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16923 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16924 's temporary directory whenever you
16925 view or export your document.
16928 \begin_layout Standard
16929 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16930 -file using the menu
16932 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16933 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16937 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16938 export variants are explained in section
16939 \begin_inset space ~
16943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16945 reference "subsec:Export"
16952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16954 \begin_inset Index idx
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16967 This file type has the extension
16968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16988 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16989 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16990 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16994 \begin_layout Standard
16995 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16996 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16997 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16998 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16999 when you view the DVI.
17000 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17003 \begin_layout Standard
17004 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17006 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17007 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17012 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17013 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17015 \begin_inset space ~
17021 The latter option uses the program
17023 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17029 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17032 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17033 font access (see section
17034 \begin_inset space ~
17038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17040 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17045 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17046 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17053 \begin_inset Index idx
17056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17057 File formats ! PostScript
17065 \begin_layout Standard
17066 This file type has the extension
17067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17079 PostScript was developed by the company
17083 as a printer language.
17084 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17086 PostScript can be seen as a
17087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17090 programming language
17091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17094 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17099 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17106 \begin_inset Index idx
17109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17111 packages ! pstricks
17121 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17124 \begin_layout Standard
17125 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17129 Encapsulated PostScript
17130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17133 (EPS, file extension
17134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17146 As \SpecialChar LyX
17147 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17148 convert them in the background to EPS.
17149 If, for example, you have 50
17150 \begin_inset space ~
17153 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17155 \begin_inset space ~
17158 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17159 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17161 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17162 EPS to avoid this problem.
17165 \begin_layout Standard
17166 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17168 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17169 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17177 \begin_inset Index idx
17180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17187 \begin_inset Index idx
17190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17199 \begin_layout Standard
17200 This file type has the extension
17201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17217 Portable Document Format
17218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17225 was derived from PostScript.
17226 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17235 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17236 looks exactly the same.
17239 \begin_layout Standard
17240 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17244 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17248 (JPG, file extension
17249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17276 Portable Network Graphics
17277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17280 (PNG, file extension
17281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17293 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17294 converts them in the
17295 background to one of these formats.
17296 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17297 will slow down your workflow.
17298 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17301 \begin_layout Standard
17302 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17304 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17310 \begin_layout Description
17312 \begin_inset space ~
17315 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17319 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17322 \begin_layout Description
17324 \begin_inset space ~
17331 ) This uses the program
17333 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17336 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17339 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17342 is a new engine, derived from
17346 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17347 access (see section
17348 \begin_inset space ~
17352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17354 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17359 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17360 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17365 \begin_layout Description
17367 \begin_inset space ~
17374 ) This uses the program
17379 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17385 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17386 font access (see section
17387 \begin_inset space ~
17391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17393 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17398 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17399 vertically written Japanese.
17402 \begin_layout Description
17404 \begin_inset space ~
17407 (cropped) This is the same as
17410 \begin_inset space ~
17415 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17416 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17417 to generate good-looking
17418 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17421 \begin_layout Description
17423 \begin_inset space ~
17426 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17430 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17434 \begin_layout Description
17436 \begin_inset space ~
17439 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17443 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17444 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17448 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17449 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17452 \begin_layout Standard
17456 \begin_inset space ~
17465 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17466 works without problems.
17467 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17468 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17472 \begin_inset space ~
17480 \begin_inset space ~
17485 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17493 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17495 \begin_inset Index idx
17498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17499 FileFormats ! XHTML
17505 \begin_inset Index idx
17508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17517 \begin_layout Standard
17518 This file type has the extension
17519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17531 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17532 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17533 When \SpecialChar LyX
17534 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17535 suitable for the purpose.
17536 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17538 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17539 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17542 between different formats, which are described in section
17544 Math Output in XHTML
17549 \begin_inset space ~
17557 \begin_layout Standard
17558 XHTML output remains
17559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17566 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17567 features are supported yet.
17571 and the World Wide Web
17575 Additional Features
17577 manual, for more information.
17580 \begin_layout Standard
17581 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17583 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17584 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17590 \begin_layout Subsection
17592 \begin_inset Index idx
17595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17604 \begin_layout Standard
17605 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17606 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17615 or use the toolbar button
17622 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17623 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17624 \begin_inset space ~
17628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17630 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17634 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17636 \begin_inset space ~
17640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17642 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17647 Further output formats can be selected via
17649 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17650 View (Other Formats)
17652 or the toolbar button
17661 \begin_layout Standard
17662 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17663 viewer window using the menu
17665 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17670 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17671 Update (Other Formats)
17676 \begin_layout Standard
17677 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17680 To have a real output, export your document.
17683 \begin_layout Section
17684 A few Words about Typography
17685 \begin_inset Index idx
17688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17697 \begin_layout Subsection
17698 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17699 \begin_inset Index idx
17702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17709 \begin_inset Index idx
17712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17721 \begin_layout Standard
17722 In \SpecialChar LyX
17724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17735 symbol comes in four variants: the
17752 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17758 \begin_layout Standard
17759 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17769 height_special "totalheight"
17774 backgroundcolor "none"
17777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17778 \begin_inset Tabular
17779 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17780 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17781 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17782 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17783 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17784 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17785 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17813 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17814 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17853 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17854 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17876 system key combination
17880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17881 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17893 and the em dash with
17896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17909 is the Mac label for the right
17920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17933 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17934 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17956 system key combination or
17957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17971 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17984 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18023 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18029 \begin_layout Standard
18030 Dashes can also be inserted with
18032 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18034 \begin_inset space ~
18037 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18045 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18046 and 2014 for the en dash).
18049 \begin_layout Standard
18050 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18051 mode and has a length of its own.
18052 Here are some examples:
18055 \begin_layout Enumerate
18056 line- and page-breaks
18057 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18067 \begin_layout Enumerate
18069 \begin_inset space ~
18073 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18083 \begin_layout Enumerate
18084 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18085 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18095 \begin_layout Enumerate
18096 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18100 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18110 \begin_layout Standard
18112 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18114 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18115 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18123 \begin_layout Subsection
18124 Dashes and Line Breaks
18125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18127 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18134 \begin_layout Standard
18135 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18136 case and locale, e.
18137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18143 \begin_layout Itemize
18144 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18145 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18148 \begin_layout Itemize
18149 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18153 \begin_layout Itemize
18154 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18155 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18158 \begin_layout Standard
18159 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18160 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18171 allows line breaks after hyphens
18172 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18174 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18177 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18180 \begin_layout Enumerate
18181 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18182 \begin_inset space ~
18185 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18187 The Elements of Typographic Style
18190 \begin_inset space ~
18193 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18196 \begin_layout Enumerate
18197 Unwanted line breaks
18202 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18204 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18207 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18214 Prevent Hyphenation
18219 \begin_inset space ~
18235 in \SpecialChar TeX
18237 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18238 , a protected space does not suffice
18242 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18249 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18250 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18251 in the document language.
18252 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18266 \begin_layout Itemize
18268 \begin_inset space ~
18272 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18282 height_special "totalheight"
18287 backgroundcolor "none"
18290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18299 \begin_layout Itemize
18301 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18311 height_special "totalheight"
18316 backgroundcolor "none"
18319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18321 \begin_inset space ~
18329 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18330 \begin_inset space ~
18333 – sont très utiles.
18336 \begin_layout Itemize
18341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18350 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18354 \begin_layout Standard
18355 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18356 \begin_inset space ~
18359 – in contrast to an overfull line
18360 \begin_inset space ~
18363 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18367 \begin_layout Standard
18368 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18372 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18373 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18374 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18379 \begin_layout Enumerate
18380 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18381 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18382 or \SpecialChar TeX
18388 \begin_layout Itemize
18390 \begin_inset space ~
18393 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18394 \begin_inset space ~
18397 – sont très utiles.
18401 \begin_layout Enumerate
18402 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18403 \begin_inset Newline newline
18408 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18409 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18411 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18413 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18415 \begin_inset space ~
18421 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18423 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18425 \begin_inset space ~
18436 \begin_layout Itemize
18437 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18438 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18439 should be followed by
18440 a line break opportunity.
18443 \begin_layout Standard
18444 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18445 \begin_inset space ~
18449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18451 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18462 \begin_layout Enumerate
18463 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18464 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18465 or en dashes (see section
18466 \begin_inset space ~
18470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18472 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18483 Changes and backwards compatibility
18486 \begin_layout Standard
18487 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18489 \begin_inset space ~
18492 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18493 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18502 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18503 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18511 \begin_layout Standard
18512 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18514 \begin_inset space ~
18517 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18519 prevents ligation to dashes.
18521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18528 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18533 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18534 after the input (unless the current text font is
18542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18543 The behavior was changed since
18544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18559 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18560 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18561 as non-breakable dashes.
18562 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18571 \begin_layout Standard
18574 \begin_inset space ~
18582 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18584 \begin_inset space ~
18587 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18590 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18591 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18592 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18593 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18595 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18599 If you used both literal and
18600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18607 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18609 \begin_inset space ~
18612 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18613 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18616 \begin_layout Subsection
18618 \begin_inset Index idx
18621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18630 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18637 \begin_layout Standard
18638 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18639 but automatically in the output.
18640 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18646 \begin_inset Index idx
18649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18656 following the rules of the document language.
18658 does not hyphenate text in the
18662 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18665 \begin_layout Standard
18667 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18671 font and with unusual constructs, like
18672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18680 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18681 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18682 This is done with the menu
18684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18685 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18687 \begin_inset space ~
18693 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18695 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18699 \begin_layout Standard
18700 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18701 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18712 would then see the hyphen
18713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18720 as a line break possibility.
18721 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18722 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18725 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18726 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18729 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18731 Prevent Hyphenation
18736 \begin_inset space ~
18744 \begin_layout Subsection
18746 \begin_inset Index idx
18749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18758 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18759 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18762 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18769 \begin_layout Standard
18770 When \SpecialChar LyX
18771 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18772 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18774 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18780 appropriate amount of space.
18781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18784 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18786 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18787 gets after another word.
18790 \begin_layout Standard
18791 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18792 not work in all cases.
18794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18805 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18806 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18809 \begin_layout Standard
18810 Here are some examples of
18814 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18817 \begin_layout Itemize
18822 \begin_layout Itemize
18827 \begin_layout Standard
18828 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18831 \begin_layout Itemize
18833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18837 this is too much space!
18840 \begin_layout Itemize
18845 \begin_layout Standard
18846 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18849 \begin_layout Standard
18850 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18853 \begin_layout Enumerate
18857 \begin_inset space ~
18862 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18863 \begin_inset space ~
18867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18869 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18874 \begin_inset Index idx
18877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18878 Spaces ! inter-word
18886 \begin_layout Enumerate
18890 \begin_inset space ~
18895 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18896 \begin_inset space ~
18900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18902 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18907 \begin_inset Index idx
18910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18919 \begin_layout Enumerate
18923 \begin_inset space ~
18927 \begin_inset space ~
18931 \begin_inset space ~
18938 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18940 \begin_inset space ~
18945 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18946 This function is also bound to
18949 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18955 \begin_layout Standard
18956 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18959 \begin_layout Itemize
18961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18965 \begin_inset space \space{}
18968 this is too much space!
18971 \begin_layout Itemize
18972 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18976 \begin_layout Standard
18977 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18978 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18980 will take care of this.
18983 \begin_layout Standard
18984 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18988 \begin_inset space ~
18994 feature described in the section
18996 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19001 Additional Features
19006 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19008 \begin_inset Index idx
19011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19012 Typography ! Quotation marks
19018 \begin_inset Index idx
19021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19022 Quotation marks | see
19026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19052 \begin_layout Standard
19054 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19055 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19056 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19066 The keyboard character,
19070 , generates this automatically.
19073 \begin_layout Standard
19074 You can specify what character the
19078 key produces by using the submenu
19084 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19088 \begin_inset Index idx
19091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19092 Document ! Settings
19097 dialog and switching the
19101 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19102 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19104 \begin_inset space ~
19110 \begin_layout Labeling
19111 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19123 \begin_inset space ~
19127 \begin_inset space ~
19131 \begin_inset Quotes els
19135 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19149 \begin_inset Quotes els
19153 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19156 quotation marks (as common, e.
19157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19163 \begin_layout Labeling
19164 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19167 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19171 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19175 \begin_inset space ~
19179 \begin_inset space ~
19183 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19187 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19193 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19197 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19201 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19205 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19208 quotation marks (as common, e.
19209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19215 \begin_layout Labeling
19216 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19219 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19223 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19227 \begin_inset space ~
19231 \begin_inset space ~
19235 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19239 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19245 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19249 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19253 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19257 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19260 quotation marks (as common, e.
19261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19267 \begin_layout Labeling
19268 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19271 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19275 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19279 \begin_inset space ~
19283 \begin_inset space ~
19287 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19291 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19297 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19301 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19305 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19309 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19312 quotation marks (as common, e.
19313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19319 \begin_layout Labeling
19320 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19323 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19327 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19331 \begin_inset space ~
19335 \begin_inset space ~
19339 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19343 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19349 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19353 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19357 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19361 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19364 quotation marks (as common, e.
19365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19368 g., in Switzerland)
19371 \begin_layout Labeling
19372 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19375 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19379 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19383 \begin_inset space ~
19387 \begin_inset space ~
19391 \begin_inset Quotes als
19395 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19401 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19405 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19409 \begin_inset Quotes als
19413 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19416 quotation marks (as common, e.
19417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19423 \begin_layout Labeling
19424 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19427 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19431 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19435 \begin_inset space ~
19439 \begin_inset space ~
19443 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19447 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19453 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19457 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19461 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19465 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19468 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19471 \begin_layout Labeling
19472 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19475 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19479 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19483 \begin_inset space ~
19487 \begin_inset space ~
19491 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19495 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19501 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19505 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19509 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19513 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19516 quotation marks (as common, e.
19517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19520 g., in Great Britain)
19523 \begin_layout Labeling
19524 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19527 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19531 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19535 \begin_inset space ~
19539 \begin_inset space ~
19543 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19547 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19553 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19557 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19561 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19565 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19568 quotation marks (as common, e.
19569 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19575 \begin_layout Labeling
19576 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19579 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19583 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19587 \begin_inset space ~
19591 \begin_inset space ~
19595 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19599 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19605 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19609 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19613 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19617 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19620 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19626 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19627 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19628 the inner marks differ).
19636 \begin_layout Labeling
19637 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19640 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19644 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19648 \begin_inset space ~
19652 \begin_inset space ~
19656 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19660 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19666 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19670 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19674 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19678 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19681 quotation marks (as common, e.
19682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19688 \begin_layout Labeling
19689 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19692 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19696 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19700 \begin_inset space ~
19704 \begin_inset space ~
19708 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19712 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19718 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19722 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19726 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19730 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19733 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19736 \begin_layout Labeling
19737 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19738 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19746 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19752 \begin_inset space ~
19756 \begin_inset space ~
19762 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19770 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19774 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19778 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19782 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19786 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19789 quotation marks (as common, e.
19790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19798 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19799 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19807 \begin_layout Labeling
19808 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19809 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19817 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19823 \begin_inset space ~
19827 \begin_inset space ~
19833 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19841 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19845 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19849 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19853 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19857 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19860 quotation marks (as common, e.
19861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19864 g., in North Korea and China)
19868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19870 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19878 \begin_layout Standard
19879 Inner quotation marks
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19885 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19886 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19894 does not necessarily mean
19895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19903 This is why we call them
19904 \begin_inset Quotes els
19908 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19924 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19926 \begin_inset Quotes els
19930 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19933 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19936 arg "quote-insert inner"
19941 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19947 \begin_layout Standard
19948 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19949 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19950 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19951 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19952 If you check the setting
19954 Use dynamic quotation marks
19958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19959 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19962 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19963 they appear in a special color).
19964 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19965 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19970 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19973 \begin_layout Standard
19974 Individual quotation marks (i.
19975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19978 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19979 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19983 \begin_layout Subsection
19985 \begin_inset Index idx
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19989 Typography ! Ligatures
19995 \begin_inset Index idx
19998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20029 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20036 \begin_layout Standard
20037 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20038 print them as single characters.
20039 These groups are known as
20044 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20045 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20047 Here are the standard ligatures:
20050 \begin_layout Itemize
20054 \begin_layout Itemize
20058 \begin_layout Itemize
20062 \begin_layout Itemize
20066 \begin_layout Itemize
20070 \begin_layout Standard
20071 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20074 \begin_layout Standard
20075 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20076 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20084 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20100 To break a ligature, use
20102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20103 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20105 \begin_inset space ~
20112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20123 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20140 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20148 \begin_layout Subsection
20150 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20152 \begin_inset Index idx
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 \begin_layout Standard
20168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20169 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20173 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20176 \begin_layout Description
20178 The name of the game.
20181 \begin_layout Description
20183 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20187 \begin_layout Description
20189 The \SpecialChar TeX
20190 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20194 \begin_layout Description
20195 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20196 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20200 \begin_layout Standard
20201 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20207 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20215 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20216 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20217 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20218 converges to the number
20219 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20222 : The actual version is
20223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20231 , the previous one was
20232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20243 \begin_layout Subsection
20245 \begin_inset Index idx
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 \begin_layout Standard
20258 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20259 space between two words.
20260 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20270 for units use the menu
20272 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20273 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20275 \begin_inset space ~
20283 arg "space-insert thin"
20289 \begin_layout Standard
20290 Here is an example to show the differences:
20293 \begin_layout Standard
20294 \begin_inset Tabular
20295 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20296 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20297 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20298 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 \begin_inset space ~
20309 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20321 space between number and unit
20328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20337 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 half space between number and unit
20362 \begin_layout Subsection
20364 \begin_inset Index idx
20367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20376 \begin_layout Standard
20377 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20379 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20380 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20381 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20382 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20383 These bits of text became known as
20394 \begin_layout Standard
20395 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20396 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20397 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20398 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20399 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20400 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20401 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20402 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20403 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20404 \begin_inset Newline newline
20412 \begin_inset Newline newline
20420 \begin_inset Newline newline
20423 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20424 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20425 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20427 \begin_inset space ~
20431 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20433 key "latexcompanion"
20439 \begin_inset space ~
20443 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20450 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20451 's page break mechanism.
20454 \begin_layout Chapter
20455 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20458 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20465 \begin_layout Standard
20466 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20469 \begin_inset space ~
20475 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20478 \begin_layout Section
20480 \begin_inset Index idx
20483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20499 \begin_layout Standard
20501 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20504 \begin_layout Description
20507 \begin_inset space ~
20510 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20511 \begin_inset Newline newline
20515 \begin_inset Note Note
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20519 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20527 \begin_layout Description
20528 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20529 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20530 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20533 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20534 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20536 \begin_inset space ~
20542 \begin_inset Newline newline
20546 \begin_inset Note Comment
20549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20559 \begin_layout Description
20561 \begin_inset space ~
20564 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20565 set in the document settings under
20567 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20569 \begin_inset space ~
20575 \begin_inset Newline newline
20579 \begin_inset Newline newline
20583 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20592 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20593 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20598 of a comment that appears in the output.
20604 \begin_inset Newline newline
20608 \begin_inset Newline newline
20611 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20614 \begin_layout Standard
20615 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20627 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20630 \begin_layout Section
20632 \begin_inset Index idx
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20644 name "sec:Footnotes"
20651 \begin_layout Standard
20653 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20659 or the toolbar button
20662 arg "footnote-insert"
20674 \begin_inset Graphics
20675 filename clipart/footnote.png
20684 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20685 's representation of your footnote.
20695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20714 label, the box will
20718 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20719 Clicking on the box label again will close
20732 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20733 and click on the footnote
20748 \begin_layout Standard
20749 Here is an example footnote:
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20758 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20766 \begin_layout Standard
20767 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20768 position where the footnote box is placed.
20769 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20770 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20771 according to the document class.
20773 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20774 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20780 ey are described in the
20783 \begin_inset space ~
20791 \begin_layout Section
20793 \begin_inset Index idx
20796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20805 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20812 \begin_layout Standard
20813 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20815 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20817 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20819 \begin_inset space ~
20824 or the toolbar button
20827 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20853 appearing within your text.
20854 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20855 's representation of your margin
20864 \begin_layout Standard
20865 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20869 \begin_inset Marginal
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 This is a marginal note.
20882 \begin_layout Standard
20883 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20884 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20885 pages, right on odd pages.
20888 \begin_layout Standard
20889 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20892 \begin_inset space ~
20900 \begin_inset space ~
20908 \begin_layout Section
20909 Graphics and Images
20910 \begin_inset Index idx
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20920 \begin_inset Index idx
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20930 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20932 name "sec:Graphics"
20939 \begin_layout Standard
20940 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20941 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20944 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20953 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20956 \begin_layout Standard
20957 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20962 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20963 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20965 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20966 \begin_inset space ~
20970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20972 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20979 \begin_layout Standard
20984 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20985 of the image in the output.
20986 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20990 \begin_inset space ~
20994 \begin_inset space ~
21003 \begin_inset space ~
21007 \begin_inset space ~
21011 \begin_inset space ~
21016 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21017 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21025 \begin_layout Standard
21029 \begin_inset space ~
21033 \begin_inset space ~
21038 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21039 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21041 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21046 \begin_inset space ~
21051 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21052 with the image size is printed.
21055 \begin_layout Standard
21056 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21057 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21059 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21062 \begin_layout Standard
21064 \begin_inset Graphics
21065 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21073 \begin_layout Standard
21074 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21075 the image into a float, see section
21076 \begin_inset space ~
21080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21082 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21089 \begin_layout Subsection
21091 \begin_inset Index idx
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21103 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21110 \begin_layout Standard
21111 You can insert images in any known file format.
21112 But as we explained in section
21113 \begin_inset space ~
21117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21119 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21123 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21125 therefore uses the program
21129 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21130 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21131 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21132 \begin_inset space ~
21136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21138 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21145 \begin_layout Standard
21146 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21149 \begin_layout Description
21151 \begin_inset space ~
21154 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21155 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21156 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21160 Graphics Interchange Format
21161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21164 (GIF, file extension
21165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21177 \begin_inset Index idx
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21212 Portable Network Graphics
21213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21216 (PNG, file extension
21217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21229 \begin_inset Index idx
21232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21264 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21268 (JPG, file extension
21269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21293 \begin_inset Index idx
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21327 \begin_layout Description
21329 \begin_inset space ~
21332 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21334 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21335 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21336 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21337 \begin_inset Newline newline
21340 Scalable image formats can be
21341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21344 Scalable Vector Graphics
21345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21348 (SVG, file extension
21349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21361 \begin_inset Index idx
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21396 Encapsulated PostScript
21397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21400 (EPS, file extension
21401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21413 \begin_inset Index idx
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21448 Portable Document Format
21449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21452 (PDF, file extension
21453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21465 \begin_inset Index idx
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21483 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21484 result will not be scalable.
21485 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21491 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21499 \begin_layout Standard
21500 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21507 \begin_layout Subsection
21508 Grouping of Image Settings
21509 \begin_inset Index idx
21512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21513 Images ! Settings grouping
21521 \begin_layout Standard
21522 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21524 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21525 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21527 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21528 need to manually change each of them.
21532 \begin_layout Standard
21533 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21536 \begin_inset space ~
21540 \begin_inset space ~
21552 \begin_inset space ~
21556 \begin_inset space ~
21562 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21563 and checking the name of the desired group.
21566 \begin_layout Section
21568 \begin_inset Index idx
21571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21587 \begin_layout Standard
21588 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21591 arg "tabular-insert"
21596 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21600 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21601 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21602 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21605 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21606 from the rest of the table.
21607 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21608 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21610 Here is an example table:
21613 \begin_layout Standard
21615 \begin_inset Tabular
21616 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21617 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21618 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21619 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21620 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21621 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21819 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21823 \begin_layout Standard
21825 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21826 This corresponds to the
21827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21834 table style listed in the style selection.
21837 \begin_layout Standard
21839 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21840 Other available styles include:
21843 \begin_layout Itemize
21845 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21854 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21858 \begin_layout Itemize
21860 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21861 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21864 \begin_layout Itemize
21866 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21875 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21876 bold top/bottom lines (see
21887 \begin_layout Standard
21889 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21890 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21891 button can be changed in
21893 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21894 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21898 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21902 \begin_layout Subsection
21906 \begin_layout Standard
21907 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21910 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21914 This brings up the table dialog.
21915 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21916 cursor is placed currently.
21917 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21918 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21919 done on all of your selection.
21922 \begin_layout Standard
21923 In addition to the table dialog, the
21926 \begin_inset space ~
21931 helps you in setting table properties.
21932 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21935 \begin_layout Standard
21939 \begin_inset space ~
21944 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21945 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21946 current cell respectively.
21947 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21949 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21950 of text, see section
21951 \begin_inset space ~
21955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21957 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21964 \begin_layout Standard
21965 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21966 using the check box
21975 This will merge the cells to
21979 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21980 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21981 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21982 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21983 in the last row without the upper border:
21986 \begin_layout Standard
21988 \begin_inset Tabular
21989 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21990 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21991 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21992 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21993 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21994 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22005 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22014 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22125 \begin_layout Standard
22126 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22127 -arguments for the table.
22128 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22129 explained in the chapter
22136 \begin_inset space ~
22142 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22143 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22144 but are visible in the output.
22147 \begin_layout Standard
22148 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 Most DVI-viewers are
22160 able to display rotations.
22168 \begin_layout Standard
22173 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22178 adds lines for all cell borders.
22181 \begin_layout Subsection
22183 \begin_inset Index idx
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 Tables ! Multi-page
22193 \begin_inset Index idx
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22205 \begin_layout Standard
22206 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22209 \begin_inset space ~
22213 \begin_inset space ~
22221 \begin_inset space ~
22226 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22227 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22230 \begin_layout Description
22235 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22236 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22237 Except for the first page, if
22240 \begin_inset space ~
22248 \begin_layout Description
22252 \begin_inset space ~
22257 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22258 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22261 \begin_layout Description
22266 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22267 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22268 except for the last page, if
22271 \begin_inset space ~
22279 \begin_layout Description
22283 \begin_inset space ~
22288 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22289 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22292 \begin_layout Description
22293 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22294 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22296 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22300 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22303 \begin_inset space ~
22311 \begin_layout Standard
22312 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22313 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22314 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22320 In this context, first means first in this order:
22323 \begin_inset space ~
22335 \begin_inset space ~
22340 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22343 \begin_layout Standard
22345 \begin_inset Tabular
22346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22347 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22348 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22349 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22350 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22351 <row endfirsthead="true">
22352 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22358 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22363 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22372 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22382 <row endfirsthead="true">
22383 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22394 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22403 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <row endhead="true">
22416 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <row endhead="true">
22447 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22467 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <row endfoot="true">
22480 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22491 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23472 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23481 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23501 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23532 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23563 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23594 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23625 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23656 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23687 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23718 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23749 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23780 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23811 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23842 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23873 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23904 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23935 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23966 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24059 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24090 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24121 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24152 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24183 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24245 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24276 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24338 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24369 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24400 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24431 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24461 <row endlastfoot="true">
24462 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24473 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24482 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24499 \begin_layout Subsection
24501 \begin_inset Index idx
24504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24513 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24520 \begin_layout Standard
24521 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24522 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24523 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24524 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24528 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24531 \begin_layout Standard
24532 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24533 for the column in the table dialog.
24534 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24535 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24539 \begin_layout Standard
24541 \begin_inset Tabular
24542 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24543 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24544 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24545 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24546 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24566 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24635 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24691 This is longer now.
24696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24747 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24748 This is longer now.
24753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24779 \begin_layout Standard
24780 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24781 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24786 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24787 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24793 Selection with the mouse or with
24797 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24798 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24799 the selection from outside the table.
24802 \begin_layout Section
24804 \begin_inset Index idx
24807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24823 \begin_layout Subsection
24827 \begin_layout Standard
24828 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24829 have a fixed location.
24831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24838 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24846 \begin_inset space ~
24851 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24852 too many notes on the current page.
24855 \begin_layout Standard
24856 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24857 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24858 and pages without text.
24859 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24860 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24861 Floats are therefore numbered.
24862 Referencing is described in section
24863 \begin_inset space ~
24867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24869 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24876 \begin_layout Standard
24877 To insert a float, use the menu
24879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24883 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24884 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24886 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24887 \begin_inset Index idx
24890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24896 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24897 paragraph within the float.
24898 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24899 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24900 left-clicking on the box label.
24901 A closed float box looks like this:
24902 \begin_inset Graphics
24903 filename clipart/float.png
24908 – a gray button with a red label.
24911 \begin_layout Standard
24912 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24914 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24917 \begin_layout Subsection
24919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24921 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24926 \begin_inset Index idx
24929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24930 Floats ! Figure floats
24938 \begin_layout Standard
24940 \begin_inset space ~
24944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24946 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24950 was created using the menu
24952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24953 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24959 arg "float-insert figure"
24963 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24972 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24976 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24977 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24979 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24981 \begin_inset space ~
24989 arg "layout-paragraph"
24995 \begin_layout Standard
24996 \begin_inset Float figure
25003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25005 \begin_inset Graphics
25006 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25016 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25021 name "fig:A-star-in"
25038 \begin_layout Standard
25039 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25040 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25042 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25051 ) and refer to it using the menu
25053 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25059 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25063 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25064 vague references like
25065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25072 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25073 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25083 For more about cross-references, see section
25084 \begin_inset space ~
25088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25090 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25097 \begin_layout Standard
25098 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25099 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25100 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25101 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25102 as described in section
25103 \begin_inset space ~
25107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25109 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25115 \begin_inset space ~
25119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25121 reference "fig:Two-images"
25125 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25126 You can also set the images one below the other.
25128 \begin_inset space ~
25132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25134 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25141 reference "fig:Star"
25145 are the subfigures.
25148 \begin_layout Standard
25149 \begin_inset Float figure
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25161 \begin_inset Float figure
25168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25169 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25174 name "fig:Undefinable"
25186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25187 \begin_inset Graphics
25188 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25200 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25204 \begin_inset Float figure
25211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 \begin_inset Graphics
25231 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25243 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25250 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25255 name "fig:Two-images"
25272 \begin_layout Subsection
25274 \begin_inset Index idx
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25278 Floats ! Table floats
25286 \begin_layout Standard
25287 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25290 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25293 or the toolbar button
25296 arg "float-insert table"
25300 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25301 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25302 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25304 \begin_inset space ~
25308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25310 reference "tab:Table-float"
25317 \begin_layout Standard
25318 \begin_inset Float table
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25331 name "tab:Table-float"
25343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25345 \begin_inset Tabular
25346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25347 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25348 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25349 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25477 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25498 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25501 \end{array}\right]$
25509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25522 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25543 \begin_layout Subsection
25545 \begin_inset Index idx
25548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25557 \begin_layout Standard
25559 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25560 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25561 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25563 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25571 \begin_inset space ~
25579 \begin_layout Section
25581 \begin_inset Index idx
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25593 \begin_layout Standard
25595 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25597 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25598 \begin_inset space \space{}
25605 \begin_layout Standard
25606 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25607 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25613 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25614 and its alignment within the page.
25617 \begin_layout Standard
25619 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25629 height_special "totalheight"
25634 backgroundcolor "none"
25637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25640 This is a minipage.
25641 The text is set in an italic style.
25644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25647 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25648 another formatting.
25656 \begin_layout Standard
25657 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25660 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25664 as described in section
25665 \begin_inset space ~
25669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25671 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25676 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25682 \begin_layout Standard
25683 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25693 height_special "totalheight"
25698 backgroundcolor "none"
25701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25702 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25703 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25709 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25713 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25723 height_special "totalheight"
25728 backgroundcolor "none"
25731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25732 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25733 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25741 \begin_layout Standard
25742 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25748 \begin_layout Standard
25749 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25751 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25758 \begin_inset space ~
25766 \begin_layout Chapter
25767 Mathematical Formulas
25768 \begin_inset Index idx
25771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25778 \begin_inset Index idx
25781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25812 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25819 \begin_layout Standard
25820 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25825 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25828 \begin_layout Section
25830 \begin_inset Index idx
25833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25842 \begin_layout Standard
25843 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25856 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25858 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25859 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25860 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25868 \begin_layout Standard
25869 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25873 \begin_inset space ~
25878 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25881 \begin_layout Standard
25882 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25883 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25886 \begin_layout Standard
25887 This is a line with an inline formula
25888 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25894 \begin_layout Standard
25895 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25896 paragraph, like this one:
25897 \begin_inset Formula
25904 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25907 \begin_layout Standard
25909 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25911 For example, typing
25912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25925 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25926 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25930 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25933 \begin_inset space ~
25941 \begin_layout Subsection
25942 Navigating in Formulas
25943 \begin_inset Index idx
25946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25955 \begin_layout Standard
25956 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25957 achieved with the arrow keys.
25959 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25960 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25965 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25966 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25970 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25974 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25977 \end{array}\right]$
25985 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25990 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25991 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25994 \begin_layout Standard
25999 , printed in this document as
26000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26004 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26011 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26012 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26013 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26018 For example, if you want
26019 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26027 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26037 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26041 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26046 , since in the latter case only the
26049 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26054 will be under the square root sign:
26055 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26061 \begin_layout Standard
26062 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26064 \begin_inset Formula
26066 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26075 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26076 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26079 \begin_layout Subsection
26083 \begin_layout Standard
26084 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26085 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26089 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26090 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26091 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26092 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26093 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26097 \begin_layout Subsection
26098 Exponents and Subscripts
26099 \begin_inset Index idx
26102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26109 \begin_inset Index idx
26112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26121 \begin_layout Standard
26122 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26125 arg "math-superscript"
26131 arg "math-subscript"
26134 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26136 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26139 , type in a formula
26142 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26152 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26158 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26162 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26168 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26174 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26183 , you have to use an extra
26187 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26188 For example, if you want
26189 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26195 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26201 Subscripts are similar: To get
26202 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26208 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26216 \begin_layout Subsection
26218 \begin_inset Index idx
26221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26230 \begin_layout Standard
26231 Create a fraction either with the command
26237 or by using the icon
26240 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26246 \begin_inset space ~
26252 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26253 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26254 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26259 To move back up, press
26264 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26265 \begin_inset Formula
26267 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26270 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26278 \begin_layout Subsection
26280 \begin_inset Index idx
26283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26292 \begin_layout Standard
26293 Roots can be created using the
26296 \begin_inset space ~
26304 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26310 arg "math-insert \\root"
26332 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26338 always produces a square root.
26341 \begin_layout Subsection
26342 Operators with Limits
26343 \begin_inset Index idx
26346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26353 \begin_inset Index idx
26356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26365 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26372 \begin_layout Standard
26374 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26378 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26381 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26382 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26383 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26384 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26385 The sum operator will automatically place its
26386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26393 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26395 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26399 \begin_inset Formula
26401 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26406 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26410 \begin_layout Standard
26411 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26413 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26414 behind the operator and using the menu
26416 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26417 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26419 \begin_inset space ~
26423 \begin_inset space ~
26437 \begin_layout Standard
26438 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26447 \begin_inset Index idx
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26457 \begin_inset Formula
26459 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26464 which will place the
26465 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26477 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26478 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26484 \begin_layout Standard
26485 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26492 Have a look at section
26493 \begin_inset space ~
26497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26499 reference "subsec:Functions"
26503 for an explanation of function macros.
26506 \begin_layout Subsection
26508 \begin_inset Index idx
26511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26520 \begin_layout Standard
26521 Most math symbols can be found in the
26524 \begin_inset space ~
26529 under one of several categories; including
26546 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26550 \begin_layout Standard
26551 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26552 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26553 don't have to use the
26556 \begin_inset space ~
26561 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26563 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26566 \begin_layout Subsection
26568 \begin_inset Index idx
26571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26580 \begin_layout Standard
26581 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26587 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26593 \begin_inset space ~
26601 arg "math-insert \\space"
26605 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26606 For example, the sequence
26611 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26614 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26616 \begin_inset Graphics
26617 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26622 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26623 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26624 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26625 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26626 , because they are negative
26628 Here are two examples:
26631 \begin_layout Standard
26641 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26647 \begin_layout Standard
26657 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26663 \begin_layout Subsection
26665 \begin_inset Index idx
26668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26677 name "subsec:Functions"
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26688 \begin_inset space ~
26693 contains under the button
26696 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26699 a number of function macros, such as
26700 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26704 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26712 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26719 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26720 avoid confusions, because
26721 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26725 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26731 \begin_layout Standard
26732 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26734 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26738 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26744 \begin_layout Standard
26745 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26746 are placed, as described in section
26747 \begin_inset space ~
26751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26753 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26760 \begin_layout Subsection
26762 \begin_inset Index idx
26765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26774 \begin_layout Standard
26775 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26777 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26778 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26779 commands, for example, to enter
26780 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26783 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26784 Our example is entered by typing
26789 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26796 \begin_inset space ~
26800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26802 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26806 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26809 \begin_layout Standard
26810 \begin_inset Float table
26817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26818 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26823 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26827 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26837 \begin_inset Tabular
26838 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26839 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26840 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26841 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26842 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26926 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26980 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27034 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27088 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27142 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27196 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27250 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27304 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27358 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27403 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27424 \begin_layout Standard
27425 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27428 \begin_inset space ~
27436 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27439 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27443 \begin_layout Section
27444 Brackets and Delimiters
27445 \begin_inset Index idx
27448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27455 \begin_inset Index idx
27458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27467 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27474 \begin_layout Standard
27475 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27477 For some purposes, using just the keys
27482 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27483 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27484 toolbar delimiter icon
27487 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27491 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27492 \begin_inset Formula
27494 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27502 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27503 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27507 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27510 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27516 \begin_inset Formula
27518 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27526 \begin_layout Standard
27527 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27528 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27532 \begin_layout Standard
27533 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27534 left side and right side.
27535 If you use the option
27538 \begin_inset space ~
27543 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27544 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27546 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27551 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27552 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27555 \begin_layout Standard
27556 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27557 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27558 is to go inside the brackets.
27559 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27564 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27565 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27566 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27570 arg "math-delim ( )"
27576 \begin_layout Section
27577 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27578 \begin_inset Index idx
27581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27588 \begin_inset Index idx
27591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27598 \begin_inset Index idx
27601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27602 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27610 \begin_layout Standard
27611 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27615 \begin_inset space ~
27623 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27627 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27628 Here is an example:
27629 \begin_inset Formula
27631 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27640 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27641 \begin_inset space ~
27645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27647 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27652 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27653 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27654 This alignment is set in the box
27659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27708 for every column as default.
27709 For example, the sequence
27710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27721 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27722 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27723 corresponds to the relevant column.
27724 The result will look like this:
27725 \begin_inset Formula
27728 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27729 column & has & has\,right\\
27730 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27739 \begin_layout Standard
27740 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27743 arg "newline-insert newline"
27746 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27747 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27749 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27752 or the math toolbar.
27755 \begin_layout Standard
27756 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27757 It can be created with the menu
27759 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27760 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27762 \begin_inset space ~
27774 Here is an example:
27775 \begin_inset Formula
27789 \begin_layout Standard
27790 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27793 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27796 arg "newline-insert newline"
27800 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27805 arg "newline-insert newline"
27808 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27816 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27817 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27818 A new row is created by every further entry of
27821 arg "newline-insert newline"
27825 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27826 Here is an example:
27827 \begin_inset Formula
27829 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27830 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27835 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27836 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27837 \begin_inset Formula
27839 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27847 \begin_layout Standard
27848 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27855 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27856 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27859 reference "eq:asquared"
27864 The other types are described in section
27865 \begin_inset space ~
27869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27871 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27878 \begin_layout Section
27879 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27880 \begin_inset Index idx
27883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27884 Math ! Formula numbering
27890 \begin_inset Index idx
27893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27894 Math ! Referencing formulas
27900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27902 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27909 \begin_layout Standard
27910 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27912 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27913 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27915 \begin_inset space ~
27919 \begin_inset space ~
27927 arg "math-number-toggle"
27931 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27932 within parentheses.
27933 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27934 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27935 the document class.
27936 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27937 separated by a dot:
27938 \begin_inset Formula
27948 arg "math-number-toggle"
27951 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27952 You can only number displayed formulas.
27955 \begin_layout Standard
27956 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27959 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27961 \begin_inset space ~
27965 \begin_inset space ~
27973 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27976 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27977 \begin_inset Formula
27980 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27986 To number all lines use the shortcut
27989 arg "math-number-toggle"
27995 \begin_layout Standard
27996 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27999 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28000 A label is inserted with the menu
28002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28011 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28012 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28013 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28025 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28026 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28027 We inserted in the following example the label
28028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28035 in the second line:
28036 \begin_inset Formula
28038 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28039 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28044 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28045 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28046 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28048 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28050 \begin_inset space ~
28058 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28062 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28063 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28064 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28065 as the formula number:
28068 \begin_layout Standard
28069 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28072 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28079 \begin_layout Standard
28080 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28081 's cross-reference box are described in section
28082 \begin_inset space ~
28086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28088 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28093 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28101 \begin_layout Section
28102 User defined math macros
28103 \begin_inset Index idx
28106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28115 \begin_layout Standard
28117 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28118 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28119 Math macros are explained in section
28122 \begin_inset space ~
28134 \begin_layout Section
28138 \begin_layout Subsection
28140 \begin_inset Index idx
28143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28152 \begin_layout Standard
28153 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28154 To set a font in a formula, use the
28157 \begin_inset space ~
28165 arg "math-insert \\font"
28168 , or enter its command, listed in table
28169 \begin_inset space ~
28173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28175 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28182 \begin_layout Standard
28183 \begin_inset Float table
28190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28191 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28196 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28200 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28210 \begin_inset Tabular
28211 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28212 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28214 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28246 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28273 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28300 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28333 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28360 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28382 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28388 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28389 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28402 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28418 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28452 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28474 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28480 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28488 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28501 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28517 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28551 \begin_layout Standard
28552 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28560 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28563 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28565 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28569 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28588 \begin_layout Standard
28589 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28590 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28595 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28596 space when you need a space in the box.
28597 Here is an example where
28598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28609 denotes the set of numbers:
28610 \begin_inset Formula
28612 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28620 \begin_layout Standard
28621 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28622 You can, for example, put a character in
28631 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28635 \begin_inset Newline newline
28638 So it is better not to use this feature.
28641 \begin_layout Standard
28642 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28643 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28647 \begin_inset Newline newline
28650 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28656 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28657 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28663 \begin_layout Standard
28670 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28673 \begin_layout Standard
28674 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28676 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28677 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28679 \begin_inset space ~
28687 \begin_layout Subsection
28689 \begin_inset Index idx
28692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28701 \begin_layout Standard
28702 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28704 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28708 \begin_inset space ~
28712 \begin_inset space ~
28720 \begin_inset space ~
28728 arg "math-insert \\font"
28732 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28733 in black instead of blue.
28734 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28735 Here is an example:
28736 \begin_inset Formula
28739 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28740 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28749 \begin_layout Subsection
28751 \begin_inset Index idx
28754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28763 \begin_layout Standard
28764 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28765 automatically chosen in most situations.
28783 For most characters,
28791 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28792 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28797 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28798 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28799 thinks are appropriate.
28800 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28803 arg "math-insert \\style"
28807 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28808 For example, you can set
28809 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28812 , which is normally in
28821 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28825 The four styles are used in the following example:
28828 \begin_layout Standard
28829 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28833 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28837 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28841 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28847 \begin_layout Standard
28848 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28849 is set in a particular size with the menu
28851 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28853 \begin_inset space ~
28858 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28859 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28860 will be adjusted to correspond.
28861 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28872 \begin_layout Standard
28876 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28882 \begin_layout Section
28883 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28885 \begin_inset Index idx
28888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28895 \begin_inset Index idx
28898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28907 \begin_layout Standard
28909 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28910 that are in common use.
28913 \begin_layout Subsection
28914 Enabling AMS-Support
28917 \begin_layout Standard
28918 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28919 the document by selecting the checkbox
28922 \begin_inset space ~
28926 \begin_inset space ~
28930 \begin_inset space ~
28937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28941 \begin_inset Index idx
28944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28945 Document ! Settings
28953 \begin_inset space ~
28959 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28960 -errors in formulas,
28961 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28964 \begin_layout Subsection
28966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28968 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28973 \begin_inset Index idx
28976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28977 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28985 \begin_layout Standard
28986 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28987 provides a selection of different formula types.
28989 allows you to choose between
29010 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29011 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29018 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29021 \begin_layout Chapter
29025 \begin_layout Section
29027 \begin_inset Index idx
29030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29039 name "sec:Cross-References"
29046 \begin_layout Standard
29047 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29048 's strengths is cross-references.
29049 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29051 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29052 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29053 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29056 \begin_layout Enumerate
29060 \begin_layout Enumerate
29061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29063 name "enu:Second-item"
29070 \begin_layout Enumerate
29074 \begin_layout Standard
29075 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29080 or by pressing the toolbar button
29087 A gray label box like this:
29088 \begin_inset Graphics
29089 filename clipart/label.png
29093 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29095 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29130 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29131 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29147 \begin_layout Standard
29148 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29153 or the toolbar button
29156 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29160 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29161 \begin_inset Graphics
29162 filename clipart/reference.png
29166 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29168 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29181 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29185 \begin_layout Standard
29186 As an alternative to
29188 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29191 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29196 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29197 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29199 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29211 \begin_layout Standard
29212 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29213 \begin_inset space ~
29217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29219 reference "enu:Second-item"
29226 \begin_layout Standard
29227 It is recommended to use a protected space
29231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29232 described in section
29233 \begin_inset space ~
29237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29239 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29248 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29249 line breaks between them.
29252 \begin_layout Standard
29253 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29256 \begin_layout Description
29257 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29260 reference "fig:Two-images"
29267 \begin_layout Description
29268 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29269 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29281 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29288 \begin_layout Description
29289 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29290 \begin_inset space ~
29294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29295 LatexCommand pageref
29296 reference "fig:Two-images"
29303 \begin_layout Description
29305 \begin_inset space ~
29309 \begin_inset space ~
29312 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29314 LatexCommand vpageref
29315 reference "fig:Two-images"
29320 \begin_inset Newline newline
29323 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29324 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29325 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29326 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29327 it prints “on the next page”.
29328 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29331 \begin_layout Description
29333 \begin_inset space ~
29337 \begin_inset space ~
29341 \begin_inset space ~
29344 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29347 reference "fig:Two-images"
29352 \begin_inset Newline newline
29355 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29361 ; otherwise it behaves like
29365 \begin_inset space ~
29369 \begin_inset space ~
29378 \begin_layout Description
29380 \begin_inset space ~
29383 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29384 \begin_inset Newline newline
29388 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29396 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29406 \begin_inset Index idx
29409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29411 packages ! prettyref
29417 \begin_inset Index idx
29420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29422 packages ! refstyle
29433 \begin_inset Newline newline
29436 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29437 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29440 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29445 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29453 is the default and preferred because
29457 supports only English documents.
29458 The format is specified by using the command
29470 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29471 preamble of the document.
29472 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29490 \begin_inset Newline newline
29497 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29502 \begin_inset Newline newline
29513 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29514 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29516 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29517 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29522 , you might do so as follows:
29523 \begin_inset Newline newline
29530 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29535 \begin_inset Newline newline
29538 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29539 the package documentation
29540 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29542 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29548 \begin_inset Newline newline
29559 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29566 \begin_layout Description
29568 \begin_inset space ~
29571 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29573 LatexCommand nameref
29574 reference "fig:Two-images"
29581 \begin_layout Description
29583 \begin_inset space ~
29586 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29587 label for the reference:
29588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29589 LatexCommand labelonly
29590 reference "fig:Two-images"
29595 \begin_inset Newline newline
29598 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29599 Code, if you want to issue a command
29600 that \SpecialChar LyX
29606 , then you may want to use the
29609 \begin_inset space ~
29614 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29624 This is the form needed for e.
29625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29629 \begin_inset space \space{}
29636 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29637 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29639 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29643 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29647 \begin_layout Standard
29648 You can only use the style
29652 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29656 is always possible.
29659 \begin_layout Standard
29660 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29661 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29663 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29664 \begin_inset space ~
29668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29670 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29678 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29682 \begin_inset space ~
29686 \begin_inset space ~
29691 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29692 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29695 \begin_inset space ~
29700 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29701 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29710 \begin_layout Standard
29711 You can change labels at any time.
29712 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29713 do not need to think about this.
29716 \begin_layout Standard
29717 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29719 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29723 \begin_layout Standard
29724 References are described in detail in the section
29725 \begin_inset space ~
29735 \begin_inset space ~
29743 \begin_layout Section
29744 Table of Contents and other Listings
29745 \begin_inset Index idx
29748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29755 \begin_inset Index idx
29758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29759 Navigating ! Outline
29765 \begin_inset Index idx
29768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29784 \begin_layout Subsection
29786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29788 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29795 \begin_layout Standard
29796 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29799 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29801 \begin_inset space ~
29805 \begin_inset space ~
29811 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29813 If you click on it, the
29817 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29818 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29819 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29821 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29823 \begin_inset space ~
29828 that is described in section
29829 \begin_inset space ~
29833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29835 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29842 \begin_layout Standard
29843 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29844 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29846 \begin_inset space ~
29850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29852 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29856 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29858 \begin_inset space ~
29862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29864 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29868 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29870 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29873 \begin_layout Subsection
29874 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29877 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29884 \begin_layout Standard
29885 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29887 You can insert them via the
29889 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29890 List/Contents/References
29893 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29896 \begin_layout Section
29897 URLs and Hyperlinks
29898 \begin_inset Index idx
29901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29908 \begin_inset Index idx
29911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29920 \begin_layout Subsection
29922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29931 \begin_layout Standard
29932 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29934 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29940 \begin_layout Standard
29941 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29943 \begin_inset Flex URL
29946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29948 https://www.lyx.org
29956 \begin_layout Standard
29957 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29963 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29967 \begin_layout Standard
29968 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29976 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29985 \begin_layout Subsection
29987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29989 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29996 \begin_layout Standard
29997 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29999 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30002 or with the toolbar button
30009 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30018 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30019 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30020 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30022 name "LyX's homepage"
30023 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30028 , an Email address like this:
30029 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30031 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30032 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30038 , or a link to a file.
30043 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30051 \begin_layout Standard
30052 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30065 to the link target.
30068 \begin_layout Standard
30069 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30070 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30071 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30072 the text style dialog.
30073 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30077 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30079 name "LyX's homepage"
30080 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30088 \begin_layout Standard
30089 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30093 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30095 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30096 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30100 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30102 \begin_inset Newline newline
30110 \begin_inset Newline newline
30117 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30118 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30122 \begin_layout Section
30124 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30126 \begin_inset Index idx
30129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30138 name "sec:Counters"
30145 \begin_layout Standard
30147 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
30148 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30149 is its ability to manage counters.
30150 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30151 modify counters directly.
30152 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30154 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
30155 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
30156 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30157 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30158 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30162 \begin_layout Standard
30164 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30165 There are five commands you can use:
30168 \begin_layout Enumerate
30170 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30171 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30174 \begin_layout Enumerate
30176 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30177 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30178 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30181 \begin_layout Enumerate
30183 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30184 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30187 \begin_layout Enumerate
30189 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30190 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30194 \begin_layout Enumerate
30196 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30197 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30200 \begin_layout Standard
30202 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30203 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30204 those that are available in the current document class.
30209 \begin_layout Section
30211 \begin_inset Index idx
30214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30223 name "sec:Appendices"
30230 \begin_layout Standard
30231 Appendices are created with the menu
30233 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30235 \begin_inset space ~
30239 \begin_inset space ~
30245 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30246 as the appendix part of the book.
30247 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30250 \begin_layout Standard
30251 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30252 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30253 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30254 and the subsection number.
30255 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30259 \begin_layout Standard
30261 \begin_inset space ~
30265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30267 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30275 \begin_inset space ~
30279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30281 reference "subsec:Export"
30288 \begin_layout Section
30290 \begin_inset Index idx
30293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30302 name "sec:Bibliography"
30309 \begin_layout Standard
30310 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30312 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30313 \begin_inset space ~
30317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30319 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30326 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30331 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30332 \begin_inset space ~
30336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30338 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30343 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30344 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30345 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30349 using a bibliography database.
30352 \begin_layout Standard
30353 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30354 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30358 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30359 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30360 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30361 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30362 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30365 \begin_layout Subsection
30366 The Bibliography Environment
30367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30369 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30376 \begin_layout Standard
30381 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30383 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30392 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30394 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30395 of ASCII characters only.
30399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30401 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30404 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30410 \begin_inset Newline newline
30414 \begin_inset Flex URL
30417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30419 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30429 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30439 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30440 \begin_inset Newline newline
30447 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30448 the number of the entry.
30453 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30462 \begin_layout Standard
30463 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30465 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30468 or the toolbar button
30471 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30475 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30476 containing the available citations.
30477 Select one or more keys from the list and
30487 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30488 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30492 \begin_layout Standard
30493 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30494 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30495 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30507 \begin_layout Standard
30511 Companion Second Edition
30514 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30516 key "latexcompanion"
30524 \begin_layout Standard
30525 The \SpecialChar LyX
30526 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30527 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30537 \begin_layout Standard
30538 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30545 \begin_inset Index idx
30548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30557 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30558 the label needs to be given the form
30559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30570 Author A and Author B(Year)
30571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30578 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30585 \begin_inset space ~
30590 in the document settings
30591 \begin_inset Index idx
30594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30595 Document ! Settings
30602 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30604 \begin_inset space ~
30610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30612 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30620 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30622 Once you have done that, the
30626 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30643 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30644 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30645 These two are madatory.
30646 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30649 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30651 ) and in abrreviated form (
30658 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30659 add the abbreviated form to
30663 and the full list to the optional
30671 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30672 If specified like this,
30674 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30675 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30685 is specified, toggling
30686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30693 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30694 full and abbreviated list
30698 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30699 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30700 the citation references.
30701 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30706 \begin_layout Standard
30707 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30710 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30712 \begin_inset space ~
30720 arg "layout-paragraph"
30724 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30727 \begin_layout Subsection
30728 Bibliography databases
30729 \begin_inset Index idx
30732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30733 Bibliography ! Databases
30739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30741 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30748 \begin_layout Standard
30749 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30755 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30757 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30758 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30763 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30765 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30766 your working field in a database.
30767 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30768 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30769 list for that document.
30770 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30774 \begin_layout Standard
30775 The database is a text file with the file extension
30776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30787 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30788 The format is explained in
30789 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30796 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30798 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30800 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30806 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30807 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30808 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30810 \begin_inset Flex URL
30813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30815 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30823 \begin_layout Standard
30825 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30826 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30827 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30829 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30831 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30832 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30833 Those are addressed by
30838 \begin_inset Index idx
30841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30843 packages ! biblatex
30849 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30850 (although it has been significantly
30851 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30861 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30862 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30863 might conversely fail to correctly
30864 handle databases that use specific
30873 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30877 \begin_layout Standard
30878 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30883 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30889 \begin_inset Index idx
30892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30893 Document ! Settings
30905 \begin_inset space ~
30910 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30918 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30919 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30921 \begin_inset Index idx
30924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30925 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30934 \begin_layout Standard
30935 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30938 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30939 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30941 \begin_inset space ~
30947 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30948 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30956 Add bibliography to TOC
30958 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30963 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30964 in the document or just the cited references.
30966 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30971 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30972 differ from the encoding of the document.
30977 \begin_layout Standard
30978 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30979 style file is a text file with the file extension
30980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30991 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30992 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30993 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30994 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30996 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31002 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31003 \begin_inset Newline newline
31007 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31009 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31019 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31024 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31028 \begin_layout Standard
31029 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31034 \begin_inset Index idx
31037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31038 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31044 \begin_inset Index idx
31047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31049 packages ! biblatex
31057 \begin_layout Standard
31058 Accessing a database via
31062 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31065 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31066 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31068 \begin_inset space ~
31074 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31075 you cannot select a
31080 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31084 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31087 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31088 As for the styles, note the following.
31093 \begin_layout Standard
31098 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31111 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31112 file (text file with the file extension
31113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31124 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31125 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31127 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31131 \begin_layout Standard
31136 styles are not set in the
31139 \begin_inset space ~
31144 dialog, but in the document settings.
31145 \begin_inset Index idx
31148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31149 Document ! Settings
31154 However, in the dialog in the
31158 field, which is only visible if you use
31162 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31163 example how its heading will appear).
31164 These options are described in detail in the
31169 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31179 \begin_layout Standard
31180 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31181 \begin_inset space ~
31185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31187 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31198 Bibliography Processors
31201 \begin_layout Standard
31202 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31203 uses a bibliography processor,
31204 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31205 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31206 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31208 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31209 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31212 \begin_layout Standard
31213 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31215 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31216 You can do this on a general level in
31218 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31219 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31220 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31223 or for individual documents in
31225 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31226 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31230 The following variants are available by default:
31233 \begin_layout Description
31234 biber a specific, modern processor
31235 \begin_inset Index idx
31238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31245 developed exclusively for
31249 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31255 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31260 makes use of; if you use the
31264 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31271 \begin_layout Description
31272 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31273 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31274 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31278 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31281 \begin_layout Description
31282 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31283 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31287 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31291 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31295 features are supported.
31298 \begin_layout Standard
31299 By default (with the
31305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31306 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31319 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31320 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31321 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31324 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31325 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31338 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31339 -based bibliography styles).
31340 This should suit most needs.
31343 \begin_layout Standard
31344 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31345 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31346 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31351 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31352 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31353 You can adjust it in
31355 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31356 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31357 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31363 \begin_layout Standard
31364 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31365 can add below the selection.
31366 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31367 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31373 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31387 \begin_layout Standard
31389 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31391 These are explained in detail in section
31393 Customizing Bibliographies
31397 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31402 Additional Features
31407 \begin_layout Subsection
31409 \begin_inset Index idx
31412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31413 Bibliography ! Citation format
31419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31421 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31428 \begin_layout Standard
31429 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31434 \begin_inset space \space{}
31437 numerical citation (as
31438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31445 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31453 ) or author-year citations (as
31454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31463 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31467 \begin_layout Standard
31468 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31471 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31472 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31476 \begin_inset Index idx
31479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31480 Document ! Settings
31485 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31491 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31492 labels, is there to use
31495 \begin_inset space ~
31506 \begin_inset space ~
31511 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31514 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31521 \begin_layout Standard
31522 With a bibliography database (see
31523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31525 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31532 ) one has in contrary to the
31536 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31537 These style formats are available:
31540 \begin_layout Description
31542 \begin_inset space ~
31545 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31546 -based approached without any additional packages
31547 (simple numeric citations).
31550 \begin_layout Description
31551 Biblatex loads the package
31556 \begin_inset Index idx
31559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31561 packages ! biblatex
31566 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31568 Biblatex citation style
31572 Biblatex bibliography style
31575 Options to the package
31579 can be entered in the
31586 \begin_layout Description
31588 \begin_inset space ~
31592 \begin_inset space ~
31595 mode) loads the package
31599 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31600 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31612 behavior very closely.
31617 this option has some additional styles.
31622 styles are also supported by this variant.
31625 \begin_layout Description
31627 \begin_inset space ~
31630 (BibTeX) loads the package
31635 \begin_inset Index idx
31638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31645 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31648 \begin_layout Description
31650 \begin_inset space ~
31653 (BibTeX) loads the package
31658 \begin_inset Index idx
31661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31668 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31671 \begin_layout Standard
31680 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31682 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31691 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31693 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31694 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31696 Biblatex citation style
31699 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31705 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31709 \begin_layout Standard
31710 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31711 are available in the
31716 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31717 a name prefix such as
31718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31733 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31738 \begin_inset space \space{}
31742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31753 \begin_layout Standard
31754 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31760 \begin_inset space \space{}
31763 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31769 \begin_inset space \space{}
31773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31785 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31789 \begin_inset space ~
31797 \begin_inset space ~
31803 Here is a simple example where the text
31804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31808 \begin_inset space ~
31812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31815 appears after the reference:
31818 \begin_layout Quote
31820 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31823 key "latexcompanion"
31831 \begin_layout Standard
31832 All styles except for
31836 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31846 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31850 \begin_layout Standard
31851 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31852 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31853 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31858 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31859 multi-citation (so-called
31860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31863 qualified citation lists
31864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31870 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31875 dialog will display three columns in the field
31882 \begin_inset space ~
31890 \begin_inset space ~
31898 \begin_inset space ~
31904 If you double-click on an item's
31907 \begin_inset space ~
31915 \begin_inset space ~
31920 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31923 General text before
31929 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31932 \begin_layout Section
31934 \begin_inset Index idx
31937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31953 \begin_layout Standard
31954 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31958 \begin_inset space ~
31963 or the toolbar button
31970 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31971 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31972 by \SpecialChar LyX
31973 as the index entry.
31976 \begin_layout Standard
31977 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31980 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31982 \begin_inset space ~
31988 A light blue box labeled
31989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32000 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32001 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32005 \begin_layout Standard
32006 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32007 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32008 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32009 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32011 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32013 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32021 \begin_layout Subsection
32022 Grouping Index Entries
32023 \begin_inset Index idx
32026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32035 \begin_layout Standard
32036 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32038 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32039 lists under the entry
32040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32048 First we create the entry
32049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32057 \begin_inset space ~
32061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32063 reference "subsec:Lists"
32068 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32069 \begin_inset space ~
32073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32075 reference "sec:Itemize"
32079 , we insert the command
32082 \begin_layout Standard
32088 \begin_layout Standard
32092 \begin_layout Standard
32098 \begin_layout Standard
32099 for the enumerated list in section
32100 \begin_inset space ~
32104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32106 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32113 \begin_layout Standard
32114 The exclamation mark
32115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32122 marks the grouping levels.
32123 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32124 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32125 If we don't have an index entry for
32126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32133 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32136 \begin_layout Subsection
32138 \begin_inset Index idx
32141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32142 Index ! Page ranges
32150 \begin_layout Standard
32151 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32153 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32154 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32155 an index entry in section
32156 \begin_inset space ~
32160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32162 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32169 \begin_layout Standard
32172 Paragraph environments|(
32175 \begin_layout Standard
32176 and another entry at the end of section
32177 \begin_inset space ~
32181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32183 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32190 \begin_layout Standard
32193 Paragraph environments|)
32196 \begin_layout Standard
32198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32221 respectively start and end the index range.
32222 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32223 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32224 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32225 An example is the index entry
32226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32229 Document ! Settings
32230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32236 \begin_layout Subsection
32238 \begin_inset Index idx
32241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32242 Index ! Cross referencing
32250 \begin_layout Standard
32251 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32252 We referred for example in the index entry
32253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32261 \begin_inset space ~
32265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32267 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32271 ) to the index entry
32272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32279 in the same section using the entry
32282 \begin_layout Standard
32285 GIF|see{Image formats}
32288 \begin_layout Standard
32289 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32291 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32292 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32295 \begin_layout Subsection
32297 \begin_inset Index idx
32300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32301 Index ! Entry order
32309 \begin_layout Standard
32310 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32311 follow the rules for the index order.
32312 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32318 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32320 \begin_inset space ~
32324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32326 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32335 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32336 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32361 \begin_inset Index idx
32364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32365 Dummy entries ! maïs
32371 \begin_inset Index idx
32374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32375 Dummy entries ! maître
32381 \begin_inset Index idx
32384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32385 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32390 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32391 maïs, maison, maître.
32392 To achieve this, we use the command
32395 \begin_layout Standard
32398 previous entry@current entry
32401 \begin_layout Standard
32402 In our case we want to have
32403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32418 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32421 \begin_layout Standard
32427 \begin_layout Standard
32428 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32429 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32431 See the next subsection for an example.
32434 \begin_layout Subsection
32436 \begin_inset Index idx
32439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32440 Index ! Entry layout
32448 \begin_layout Standard
32449 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32450 \begin_inset Index idx
32453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32456 This is an italic dummy entry
32461 You can also format the page number using the character
32462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32469 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32470 -command without a backslash.
32471 We can write for example
32474 \begin_layout Standard
32477 italic page number:|textit
32480 \begin_layout Standard
32481 to get the page number in italic.
32482 \begin_inset Index idx
32485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32486 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32491 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32492 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32510 \begin_inset space ~
32516 Have a look at section
32517 \begin_inset space ~
32521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32523 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32527 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32531 \begin_layout Standard
32532 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32540 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32544 to generate the index, see section
32545 \begin_inset space ~
32549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32551 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32560 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32565 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32566 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32569 key "latexcompanion"
32582 \begin_layout Standard
32583 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32585 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32586 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32587 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32588 If so, put the following in the preamble
32591 \begin_layout Standard
32603 \begin_layout Standard
32607 \begin_layout Standard
32613 \begin_layout Standard
32614 in the index entry.
32615 \begin_inset Index idx
32618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32619 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32624 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32625 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32626 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32629 \begin_layout Standard
32630 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32631 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32632 a bold font for all index entries.
32633 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32645 documentation for details,
32646 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32648 key "makeindex,xindy"
32656 \begin_layout Subsection
32658 \begin_inset Index idx
32661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32670 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32677 \begin_layout Standard
32678 If the index generation program
32682 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32683 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32687 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32688 distribution, is used.
32692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32697 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32698 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32699 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32700 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32701 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32711 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32713 dialog, see section
32714 \begin_inset space ~
32718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32720 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32725 The available options are listed and explained in
32726 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32728 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32734 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32738 \begin_layout Standard
32739 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32740 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32743 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32744 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32748 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32749 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32752 \begin_layout Subsection
32756 \begin_layout Standard
32757 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32758 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32766 next to the standard index.
32768 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32769 that add this feature.
32776 \begin_inset Index idx
32779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32781 packages ! splitidx
32786 package to generate multiple indexes.
32787 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32793 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32803 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32804 style, but it also includes
32805 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32806 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32814 \begin_layout Standard
32815 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32816 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32819 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32822 and select the option
32824 Use multiple Indexes
32831 already contains the standard index
32832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32840 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32841 also appear as a heading) to the
32845 input field and press the
32850 The new index now also appears in the list.
32851 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32852 label color to the new index.
32855 \begin_layout Standard
32856 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32860 List/Contents/References
32866 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32867 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32868 are additional features:
32871 \begin_layout Itemize
32872 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32873 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32876 \begin_layout Itemize
32877 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32878 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32883 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32884 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32885 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32886 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32889 \begin_layout Itemize
32894 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32895 code in the name of the index.
32898 \begin_layout Section
32899 Nomenclature/Glossary
32900 \begin_inset Index idx
32903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32910 \begin_inset Index idx
32913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32944 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32951 \begin_layout Standard
32952 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32953 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32954 called nomenclature or glossary.
32957 \begin_layout Standard
32958 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32965 \begin_inset Index idx
32968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32976 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32978 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32985 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32989 \begin_layout Standard
32990 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32991 and then use the menu
32993 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32999 \begin_inset space ~
33004 or the toolbar button
33007 arg "nomencl-insert"
33012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33023 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33026 \begin_layout Standard
33027 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33028 The first is the term or
33032 that you wish to define.
33037 of the term or symbol.
33040 \begin_layout Standard
33041 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33049 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33050 code for nomenclature entries the option
33054 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33062 \begin_layout Subsection
33063 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33064 \begin_inset Index idx
33067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33068 Nomenclature ! Layout
33076 \begin_layout Standard
33077 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33081 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33088 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33096 \begin_inset Newline newline
33104 \begin_inset Newline newline
33110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33117 character starts/ends the formula.
33118 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33119 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33131 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33141 \begin_layout Standard
33142 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33143 syntax is given in section
33144 \begin_inset space ~
33148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33150 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33157 \begin_layout Standard
33161 \begin_inset space ~
33166 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33168 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33173 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33180 in this document is:
33181 \begin_inset Newline newline
33186 dummy entry for the character
33191 \begin_inset Newline newline
33203 \begin_inset space ~
33213 font use the command
33242 \begin_layout Standard
33243 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33248 \begin_inset space \space{}
33252 \begin_inset Newline newline
33268 \begin_inset Newline newline
33271 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33272 This command will make the font of all symbols
33279 \begin_inset space ~
33287 \begin_layout Standard
33288 If the characters |
33289 \begin_inset space \space{}
33293 \begin_inset space \space{}
33297 \begin_inset space \space{}
33301 \begin_inset space \space{}
33305 \begin_inset space \space{}
33308 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33309 code they need to be escaped
33310 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33311 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33312 LatexCommand nomenclature
33313 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33314 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33322 \begin_layout Subsection
33323 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33324 \begin_inset Index idx
33327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33328 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33336 \begin_layout Standard
33337 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33338 -code of the symbol
33340 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33342 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33345 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33346 LatexCommand nomenclature
33348 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33356 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33360 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33361 LatexCommand nomenclature
33364 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33370 They will be sorted by
33371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33397 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33400 will be sorted before the
33404 since the character
33405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33412 is considered in sorting.
33415 \begin_layout Standard
33416 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33419 \begin_inset space ~
33424 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33425 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33427 For the example given, you can insert
33431 in this field for the
33432 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33439 will be located before
33440 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33446 \begin_layout Standard
33447 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33452 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33462 \begin_layout Subsection
33463 Nomenclature Options
33464 \begin_inset Index idx
33467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33468 Nomenclature ! Options
33474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33476 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33483 \begin_layout Standard
33488 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33489 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33492 \begin_layout Description
33493 refeq Appends the phrase
33494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33509 to every nomenclature entry, where
33515 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33518 \begin_layout Description
33519 refpage Appends the phrase
33520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33535 to every nomenclature entry, where
33541 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33544 \begin_layout Description
33545 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33548 \begin_layout Standard
33549 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33550 class options list in the
33552 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33556 In this document the options
33563 \begin_layout Standard
33564 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33570 \begin_layout Standard
33571 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33572 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33577 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33580 \begin_layout Description
33590 \begin_layout Description
33593 nomrefpage Like the
33600 \begin_layout Description
33603 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33612 \begin_layout Description
33616 \begin_inset space ~
33622 \begin_inset space ~
33627 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33630 \begin_layout Standard
33632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33639 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33640 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33644 \begin_layout Standard
33653 \begin_inset Newline newline
33659 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33663 \begin_inset space ~
33675 unskip, see equation
33678 \begin_inset Newline newline
33685 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33686 \begin_inset Newline newline
33692 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33696 \begin_inset space ~
33713 \begin_layout Standard
33714 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33717 \begin_inset space ~
33722 in the document settings under
33725 \begin_inset space ~
33733 \begin_layout Standard
33741 \begin_inset Newline newline
33745 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33749 \begin_inset space ~
33761 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33763 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33764 \begin_inset Newline newline
33771 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33772 \begin_inset Newline newline
33776 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33780 \begin_inset space ~
33792 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33797 \begin_layout Subsection
33798 Printing the Nomenclature
33799 \begin_inset Index idx
33802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33803 Nomenclature ! Printing
33811 \begin_layout Standard
33812 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33815 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33831 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33832 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33833 You can choose between these settings:
33836 \begin_layout Description
33837 Default a space of 1
33838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33844 \begin_layout Description
33846 \begin_inset space ~
33850 \begin_inset space ~
33853 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33856 \begin_layout Description
33857 Custom custom space
33860 \begin_layout Standard
33861 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33870 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33878 For example, in order to change the name to
33882 , add the following line to the preamble:
33885 \begin_layout Standard
33898 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33901 \begin_layout Standard
33902 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33903 \begin_inset Newline newline
33918 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33921 \begin_layout Subsection
33922 Nomenclature Program
33923 \begin_inset Index idx
33926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33927 Nomenclature ! Program
33933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33935 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33942 \begin_layout Standard
33948 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33949 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33951 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33956 by adding options, see section
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33963 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33968 The available options are listed and explained in
33969 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33971 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33979 \begin_layout Section
33981 \begin_inset Index idx
33984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33991 \begin_inset Index idx
33994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33995 Document ! Branches
34001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34003 name "sec:Branches"
34010 \begin_layout Standard
34011 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34012 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34013 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34014 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34017 \begin_layout Standard
34018 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34019 allows you to put text into branches.
34020 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34021 To create a branch, either select the menu
34023 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34024 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34027 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34036 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34037 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34038 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34039 and whether the name of the branch should
34040 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34041 (see below for an example).
34042 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34043 to the name of the other) and to add
34044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34056 \begin_inset space ~
34059 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34060 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34063 \begin_layout Standard
34064 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34065 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34067 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34070 where you can choose a branch.
34071 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34075 \begin_layout Standard
34076 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34077 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34080 \begin_layout Standard
34081 \begin_inset Branch Question
34085 \begin_layout Standard
34090 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34098 \begin_layout Standard
34099 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34103 \begin_layout Standard
34108 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34116 \begin_layout Standard
34123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34124 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34127 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34128 Consider for example a file
34129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34136 which has the above branches.
34138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34145 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34169 branch were inactive,
34170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34185 branch was active, likewise
34186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34201 branch was active, and
34202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34205 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34209 if both branches were active.
34210 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34211 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34217 \begin_layout Standard
34218 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34224 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34225 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34229 \begin_inset space ~
34237 \begin_layout Standard
34238 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34242 \begin_layout Standard
34248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34255 branch is deactivated.
34261 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34267 \begin_layout Standard
34268 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34269 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34270 definitions for each branch.
34271 For example you can define for the question branch
34275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34276 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34277 -syntax, see section
34278 \begin_inset space ~
34282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34284 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34306 \begin_layout Standard
34316 \begin_layout Standard
34317 and for the answer branch
34320 \begin_layout Standard
34330 \begin_layout Standard
34340 \begin_layout Standard
34341 \begin_inset Branch Question
34345 \begin_layout Standard
34349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34377 \begin_layout Standard
34378 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34382 \begin_layout Standard
34386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34414 \begin_layout Standard
34415 Now it is possible to use the
34419 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34426 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34429 commands to obtain conditional output.
34430 Here is an example formula where only the
34437 \begin_inset Formula
34439 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34447 \begin_layout Standard
34448 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34456 \begin_layout Standard
34457 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34463 \begin_inset space \space{}
34466 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34468 For this advanced usage, see the
34474 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34479 \begin_layout Section
34481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34483 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34488 \begin_inset Index idx
34491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34500 \begin_layout Standard
34503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34504 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34507 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34509 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34515 \begin_inset Index idx
34518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34520 packages ! hyperref
34525 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34526 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34527 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34528 part of the document.
34532 \begin_layout Standard
34533 The header information in the dialog tab
34537 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34538 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34539 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34540 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34544 \begin_inset space ~
34548 \begin_inset space ~
34553 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34554 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34555 and author entries.
34559 \begin_inset space ~
34563 \begin_inset space ~
34567 \begin_inset space ~
34572 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34575 \begin_layout Standard
34576 You can specify in the dialog tab
34580 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34585 \begin_inset space ~
34589 \begin_inset space ~
34593 \begin_inset space ~
34598 option allows long links to be split;
34601 \begin_inset space ~
34605 \begin_inset space ~
34609 \begin_inset space ~
34617 \begin_inset space ~
34622 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34625 \begin_inset space ~
34630 colors the different links.
34631 The default colors are:
34634 \begin_layout Labeling
34635 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34640 for hyperlinks and URLs
34643 \begin_layout Labeling
34644 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34652 \begin_layout Labeling
34653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34661 \begin_layout Standard
34662 but you can change these in the field
34667 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34670 \begin_layout Standard
34673 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34676 \begin_layout Standard
34681 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34682 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34683 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34686 \begin_layout Standard
34691 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34692 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34693 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34703 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34704 when opening the PDF.
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34709 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34710 \begin_inset space ~
34713 1 will only display the sections.
34716 \begin_layout Standard
34717 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34718 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34724 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34725 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34735 \begin_layout Section
34737 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34741 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34748 \begin_layout Subsection
34751 \begin_inset Index idx
34754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34764 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34771 \begin_layout Standard
34772 As \SpecialChar LyX
34773 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34774 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34775 commands and constructs,
34778 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34779 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34780 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34781 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34782 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34783 cannot support all packages and
34787 \begin_layout Standard
34788 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34789 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34790 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34794 Code box is created by the menu
34796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34798 \begin_inset space ~
34803 or by the toolbar button
34816 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34824 \begin_layout Standard
34825 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34827 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34829 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34834 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34839 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34846 , you can write the command part
34852 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34853 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34857 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34858 Code box behind the word.
34859 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34860 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34864 \begin_layout Standard
34865 \begin_inset Graphics
34866 filename clipart/ERT.png
34874 \begin_layout Standard
34878 \begin_layout Standard
34879 This is a line with a
34883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34906 \begin_layout Standard
34907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34915 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34916 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34917 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34918 know that the command is finished.
34926 \begin_layout Subsection
34927 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34929 \begin_inset Argument 1
34932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34933 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34940 \begin_inset Index idx
34943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34953 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34960 \begin_layout Standard
34961 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34962 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34963 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34964 uses in the background.
34965 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34966 is based on commands, you can
34967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34975 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34976 any time if you know the right commands.
34977 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34978 is the end of the day.
34979 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34980 all caption labels bold.
34981 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34983 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34987 \begin_layout Standard
34988 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34990 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34992 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34995 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35005 \begin_layout Standard
35006 As result you find that the package
35011 \begin_inset Index idx
35014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35022 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35027 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35031 \begin_inset space ~
35039 \begin_layout Standard
35044 usepackage[options]{package name}
35047 \begin_layout Standard
35048 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35049 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35050 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35051 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35054 \begin_layout Standard
35055 In your case the package name is
35060 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35065 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35066 So you add the command
35069 \begin_layout Standard
35074 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35077 \begin_layout Standard
35078 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35083 For more commands provided by the
35087 package, have a look at its documentation,
35088 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35103 \begin_layout Standard
35104 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35106 For example if you use a
35110 class, you don't need the package
35114 , you can instead write
35117 \begin_layout Standard
35122 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35127 \begin_layout Standard
35128 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35129 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35130 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35137 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35140 \begin_layout Standard
35141 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35142 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35144 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35145 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35146 Code box as described in the previous
35150 \begin_layout Standard
35151 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35152 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35155 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35157 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35165 \begin_layout Standard
35166 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35172 \begin_layout Standard
35176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35186 \begin_inset Note Note
35189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35190 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35198 \begin_layout Left Header
35199 \begin_inset Argument 1
35202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35222 \begin_inset Note Note
35225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35226 defines the header line as described below
35234 \begin_layout Center Header
35235 \begin_inset Argument 1
35238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35247 \begin_layout Right Header
35248 \begin_inset Argument 1
35251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35272 \begin_layout Left Footer
35273 \begin_inset Argument 1
35276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35297 \begin_layout Center Footer
35298 \begin_inset Argument 1
35301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35313 \begin_inset Newline newline
35317 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35323 \begin_layout Right Footer
35324 \begin_inset Argument 1
35327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35349 \begin_layout Section
35350 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35353 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35358 \begin_inset Index idx
35361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35362 Document ! Header/Footer line
35368 \begin_inset Index idx
35371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35380 \begin_layout Standard
35381 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35385 \begin_inset space ~
35396 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35402 \begin_inset space ~
35408 As a second step add in the menu
35410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35411 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35420 Custom Header/Footerlines
35423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35427 This module offers the following 6
35428 \begin_inset space ~
35434 \begin_layout Description
35436 \begin_inset space ~
35440 \begin_inset space ~
35444 \begin_inset space ~
35448 \begin_inset space ~
35452 \begin_inset space ~
35458 \begin_layout Description
35460 \begin_inset space ~
35464 \begin_inset space ~
35468 \begin_inset space ~
35472 \begin_inset space ~
35476 \begin_inset space ~
35482 \begin_layout Standard
35483 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35484 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35487 \begin_layout Standard
35488 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35489 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35491 \begin_inset space ~
35495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35497 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35501 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35504 \begin_layout Standard
35505 \begin_inset Float figure
35512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35515 \begin_inset Tabular
35516 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35517 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35518 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35519 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35520 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35522 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35540 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35551 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35569 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35580 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35584 The normal text on the page goes here.
35585 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35587 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35588 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35593 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35602 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35631 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35660 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35678 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35683 name "fig:Page-layout"
35687 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35700 \begin_layout Standard
35701 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35709 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35713 \begin_inset space ~
35718 is set to “Default”.
35719 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35728 \begin_layout Subsection
35732 \begin_layout Standard
35733 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35734 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35735 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35736 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35738 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35740 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35743 \begin_layout Standard
35744 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35745 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35749 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35751 \begin_inset space ~
35759 \begin_layout Description
35762 thepage prints the current page number
35765 \begin_layout Description
35768 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35771 \begin_layout Description
35774 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35777 \begin_layout Description
35780 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35781 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35788 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35791 because it usually goes in a left header.
35794 \begin_layout Description
35797 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35798 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35800 It is normally used in the right header.
35803 \begin_layout Subsection
35804 Default header/footer
35807 \begin_layout Standard
35808 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35809 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35810 footer has the page number.
35811 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35812 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35813 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35816 \begin_inset space ~
35824 \begin_layout Subsection
35828 \begin_layout Standard
35829 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35830 Some pages are different.
35831 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35832 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35833 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35834 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35835 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35839 Header and footer decoration line
35842 \begin_layout Standard
35843 By default, you get a 0.4
35844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35847 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35848 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35860 in the following way:
35863 \begin_layout Standard
35870 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35873 \begin_layout Standard
35874 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35887 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35894 \begin_layout Standard
35895 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35897 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35898 \begin_inset space ~
35902 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35912 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35913 Several header/footer lines
35916 \begin_layout Standard
35917 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35918 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35919 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35921 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35937 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35939 \begin_inset space ~
35947 \begin_layout Standard
35954 headheight}{height}
35957 \begin_layout Standard
35962 is a size in standard units (e.
35963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35967 \begin_inset space \space{}
35975 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35976 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35977 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35978 logfile with the menu
35980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35982 \begin_inset space ~
35990 \begin_inset space ~
35995 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36000 \begin_inset Index idx
36003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36005 packages ! fancyhdr
36011 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36012 for your header/footer.
36015 \begin_layout Subsection
36019 \begin_layout Standard
36020 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36021 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36022 This example consists of the following definition:
36025 \begin_layout Description
36027 \begin_inset space ~
36036 , empty optional argument
36039 \begin_layout Description
36041 \begin_inset space ~
36044 Header empty, empty optional argument
36047 \begin_layout Description
36049 \begin_inset space ~
36058 in the optional argument
36061 \begin_layout Description
36063 \begin_inset space ~
36072 in the optional argument
36075 \begin_layout Description
36077 \begin_inset space ~
36090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36094 \begin_inset Newline newline
36098 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36105 in the optional argument
36108 \begin_layout Description
36110 \begin_inset space ~
36119 , empty optional argument
36122 \begin_layout Description
36125 headrulewidth set to 2
36126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36132 \begin_layout Standard
36133 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36134 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36140 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36150 \begin_layout Standard
36151 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36157 \begin_layout Standard
36161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36165 pagestyle{headings}
36171 \begin_inset Note Note
36174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36175 switches back to page style with the default headings
36183 \begin_layout Section
36184 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36187 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36192 \begin_inset Index idx
36195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36202 \begin_inset Index idx
36205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36214 \begin_layout Standard
36216 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36217 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36218 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36221 \begin_layout Subsection
36225 \begin_layout Standard
36226 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36232 \begin_inset Index idx
36235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36237 packages ! preview-latex
36242 (on some systems named simply
36247 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36249 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36256 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36258 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36266 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36267 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36268 -package are automatically
36269 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36273 \begin_layout Subsection
36277 \begin_layout Standard
36278 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36279 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36281 activate the option
36284 \begin_inset space ~
36291 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36297 \begin_inset space ~
36301 \begin_inset space ~
36304 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36311 \begin_inset space ~
36324 \begin_inset space ~
36329 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36332 \begin_layout Standard
36333 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36338 \begin_inset space ~
36346 \begin_inset space ~
36354 \begin_layout Standard
36355 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36356 and when you finish
36360 \begin_layout Standard
36361 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36369 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36370 generated by activating the option
36373 \begin_inset space ~
36379 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36387 \begin_layout Subsection
36388 Selected document parts
36391 \begin_layout Standard
36392 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36393 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36394 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36395 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36397 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36399 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36403 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36404 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36405 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36408 \begin_layout Standard
36409 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36416 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36428 is explained in section
36430 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36435 \begin_inset space ~
36445 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36446 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36447 the final rotated boxes,
36448 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36449 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36451 Here is the result:
36454 \begin_layout Standard
36455 \begin_inset Preview
36457 \begin_layout Standard
36462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36466 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36472 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36482 height_special "totalheight"
36487 backgroundcolor "none"
36490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36515 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36521 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36543 \begin_layout Standard
36544 Previewing works also for colors.
36545 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36564 is explained in section
36571 \begin_inset space ~
36584 \begin_layout Standard
36585 \begin_inset Preview
36587 \begin_layout Standard
36591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36610 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36615 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36634 \begin_layout Standard
36635 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36641 \begin_layout Standard
36642 If \SpecialChar LyX
36643 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36644 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36645 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36646 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36647 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36648 the \SpecialChar TeX
36650 If \SpecialChar LyX
36651 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36652 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36654 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36655 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36656 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36659 \begin_layout Subsection
36664 \begin_layout Standard
36665 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36666 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36669 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36671 \begin_inset space ~
36676 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36678 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36680 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36681 's main window, then only this selection
36682 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36683 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36684 the source view window.
36689 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36690 ; but note that if you have
36691 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36693 not just the one which is open at the time.
36696 \begin_layout Section
36697 Advanced Find and Replace
36698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36700 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36705 \begin_inset Index idx
36708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36715 \begin_inset Index idx
36718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36727 \begin_layout Subsection
36731 \begin_layout Standard
36732 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36733 allows for searching of complex,
36734 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36736 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36737 The key-features are:
36740 \begin_layout Itemize
36741 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36742 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36743 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36747 \begin_layout Itemize
36748 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36749 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36750 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36751 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36754 \begin_layout Itemize
36755 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36756 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36757 outside of mathematics environments
36760 \begin_layout Itemize
36761 Search may be widened to a specific
36766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36770 \begin_inset space ~
36773 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36774 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36781 \begin_layout Itemize
36782 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36783 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36788 \begin_inset space ~
36791 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36794 \begin_layout Subsection
36798 \begin_layout Standard
36799 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36801 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36814 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36817 ) or the toolbar button
36820 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36826 Advanced Find and Replace
36831 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36835 \begin_layout Standard
36841 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36845 \begin_inset space ~
36850 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36853 arg "paragraph-break"
36857 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36858 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36862 arg "paragraph-break"
36865 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36869 searches backwards.
36872 \begin_layout Standard
36876 \begin_inset space ~
36881 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36890 \begin_inset space ~
36895 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36899 Searching for mathematics
36902 \begin_layout Standard
36903 Mathematical formulas, such as
36904 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36907 or something more complex like
36908 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36911 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36916 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36917 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36918 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36919 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36929 \begin_layout Standard
36930 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36931 This is done by switching to the
36935 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36940 This way, entering in the
36947 \begin_layout Itemize
36948 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36949 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36952 \begin_layout Itemize
36953 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36954 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36957 \begin_layout Itemize
36958 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36959 of it only within section headings.
36960 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36961 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36965 \begin_layout Itemize
36966 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36967 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36970 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36974 \begin_layout Standard
36975 The entries made in the
36979 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36982 \begin_inset space ~
36988 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36992 button or alternatively press
36995 arg "paragraph-break"
37002 while the cursor is in the
37005 \begin_inset space ~
37013 \begin_layout Standard
37014 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37016 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37020 \begin_layout Itemize
37021 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37022 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37030 with its typewriter version
37031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37045 \begin_layout Itemize
37046 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37052 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37064 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37071 (you may want to enable the
37074 \begin_inset space ~
37082 \begin_inset space ~
37087 options and disable the
37095 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37103 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37104 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37108 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37111 , or occurrences of
37112 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37116 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37122 \begin_layout Subsection
37126 \begin_layout Standard
37127 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37132 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37134 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37136 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37146 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37152 This is done with the context menu
37154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37155 Insert Regular Expression
37157 while the cursor is in the
37162 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37163 expression matching rules
37167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37168 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37175 \begin_inset space ~
37178 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37179 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37185 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37186 same text in the document.
37187 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37188 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37191 \begin_layout Enumerate
37192 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37197 editor the fraction
37198 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37202 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37205 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37206 fractions with the given denominator.
37209 \begin_layout Enumerate
37210 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37222 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37227 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37228 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37229 Also, by inserting a
37230 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37233 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37234 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37237 \begin_layout Standard
37238 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37239 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37240 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37243 , and referring back to them through
37244 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37248 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37252 For example, try searching with the regexp
37253 \begin_inset Newline newline
37256 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37259 \begin_inset Newline newline
37262 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37265 \begin_layout Standard
37266 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37269 \begin_layout Standard
37270 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37278 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37279 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37280 sub-expressions is absolute.
37282 \begin_inset space ~
37286 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37289 always refers to the first occurrence of
37290 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37293 in all entered regexps.
37301 \begin_layout Section
37303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37305 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37310 \begin_inset Index idx
37313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37322 \begin_layout Standard
37324 has a built-in spell checker.
37327 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37334 key or the toolbar button
37337 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37340 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37341 beginning of the currently selected text.
37342 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37343 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37344 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37345 scrolled so that it is visible.
37346 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37347 n, if any could be found.
37348 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37352 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37353 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37356 \begin_layout Standard
37357 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37364 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37365 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37367 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37368 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37371 \begin_inset space ~
37379 arg "dialog-show character"
37382 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37384 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37387 \begin_layout Standard
37388 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37389 can be downloaded from here:
37390 \begin_inset Newline newline
37394 \begin_inset Flex URL
37397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37399 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37405 \begin_inset Newline newline
37409 \begin_inset space ~
37412 files for each language.
37413 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37414 \begin_inset space ~
37417 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37418 's installation subfolder
37426 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37428 \begin_inset Newline newline
37431 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37432 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37433 but in most cases these are
37449 is the language code.
37452 \begin_layout Subsection
37456 \begin_layout Standard
37459 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37460 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37462 \begin_inset space ~
37465 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37468 you can set the following things:
37471 \begin_layout Description
37473 \begin_inset space ~
37476 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37477 should use for spell checking.
37478 Depending on your platform,
37488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37489 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37490 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37505 \begin_inset space ~
37508 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37511 \begin_layout Description
37513 \begin_inset space ~
37516 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37517 will always use the given language
37518 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37521 \begin_layout Description
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37526 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37532 \begin_inset space \space{}
37536 This should normally not be needed.
37539 \begin_layout Description
37541 \begin_inset space ~
37545 \begin_inset space ~
37548 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37560 \begin_layout Description
37562 \begin_inset space ~
37565 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37566 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37567 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37568 appear in a context menu.
37569 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37573 \begin_layout Description
37575 \begin_inset space ~
37579 \begin_inset space ~
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37586 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37590 \begin_layout Section
37592 \begin_inset Index idx
37595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37604 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37611 \begin_layout Standard
37613 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37614 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37624 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37626 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37636 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37638 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37639 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37640 which are available for many languages.
37643 \begin_layout Standard
37644 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37645 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37649 \begin_layout Subsection
37650 Setting up the thesaurus
37653 \begin_layout Standard
37662 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37666 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37671 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37677 \begin_inset space ~
37685 For instance, the US English files are named:
37688 \begin_layout Itemize
37692 \begin_layout Itemize
37696 \begin_layout Standard
37705 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37706 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37709 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37710 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37711 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37713 \begin_inset space ~
37718 ) to the path where they are installed.
37722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37723 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37724 ies, typical locations are
37730 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37734 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37738 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37741 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37747 LibreOffice-<Version>
37754 On the Mac, the default location is
37756 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37757 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37758 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37759 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37760 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37761 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37769 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37770 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37771 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37775 \begin_layout Standard
37776 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37777 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37779 \begin_inset Newline newline
37783 \begin_inset Flex URL
37786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37788 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37796 \begin_layout Standard
37797 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37798 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37800 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37801 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37802 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37804 \begin_inset space ~
37809 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37811 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37812 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37816 \begin_layout Standard
37817 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37819 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37822 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37828 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37831 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37832 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37840 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37841 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37842 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37844 \begin_inset space ~
37849 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37852 \begin_layout Subsection
37853 Using the thesaurus
37856 \begin_layout Standard
37857 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37859 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37862 or the toolbar button
37865 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37868 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37870 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37872 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37873 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37874 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37883 ), related terms (such as
37886 \begin_inset space ~
37895 ), compounds (such as
37898 \begin_inset space ~
37907 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37916 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37919 \begin_layout Standard
37920 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37921 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37925 \begin_layout Standard
37926 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37927 the dictionary, such as the above
37931 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37936 \begin_inset space \space{}
37939 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37940 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37941 For example, looking up the word form
37945 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37950 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37955 \begin_inset space \space{}
37966 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37967 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37968 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37971 \begin_layout Section
37973 \begin_inset Index idx
37976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37983 \begin_inset Index idx
37986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37987 Document ! Change Tracking
37993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37995 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38002 \begin_layout Standard
38003 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38004 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38005 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38006 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38010 \begin_inset space ~
38013 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38015 \begin_inset space ~
38023 \begin_layout Standard
38024 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38038 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38039 You can change the color in
38041 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38042 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38044 \begin_inset space ~
38048 \begin_inset space ~
38053 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38059 \begin_inset Index idx
38062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38063 Color ! Change tracking
38068 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38069 's status bar when the
38070 cursor is in changed text.
38071 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38074 arg "changes-merge"
38080 \begin_layout Standard
38081 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38083 \begin_inset Index idx
38086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38095 \begin_layout Standard
38096 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38102 \begin_layout Standard
38103 \begin_inset Graphics
38104 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38112 \begin_layout Standard
38113 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38119 \begin_layout Standard
38120 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38123 \begin_layout Standard
38124 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38130 \begin_layout Standard
38131 \begin_inset Tabular
38132 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38133 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38134 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38135 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38145 arg "changes-track"
38153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38161 \begin_inset space ~
38164 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38166 \begin_inset space ~
38175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38184 arg "changes-output"
38192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38198 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38200 \begin_inset space ~
38203 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38205 \begin_inset space ~
38209 \begin_inset space ~
38213 \begin_inset space ~
38222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38243 Jumps to the next change
38249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38258 arg "change-accept"
38266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38272 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38274 \begin_inset space ~
38277 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38279 \begin_inset space ~
38288 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38297 arg "change-reject"
38305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38311 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38313 \begin_inset space ~
38316 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38318 \begin_inset space ~
38327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38336 arg "changes-merge"
38344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38352 \begin_inset space ~
38355 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38357 \begin_inset space ~
38366 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38375 arg "all-changes-accept"
38383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38389 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38391 \begin_inset space ~
38394 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38396 \begin_inset space ~
38400 \begin_inset space ~
38409 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38418 arg "all-changes-reject"
38426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38434 \begin_inset space ~
38437 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38439 \begin_inset space ~
38443 \begin_inset space ~
38452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38476 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38478 \begin_inset space ~
38487 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38510 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38512 \begin_inset space ~
38528 \begin_layout Standard
38529 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38535 \begin_layout Standard
38536 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38556 \begin_layout Standard
38557 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38558 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38559 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38560 the next change after the current cursor position.
38561 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38562 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38563 step to the next change.
38564 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38567 \begin_layout Standard
38568 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38569 to describe a change.
38572 \begin_layout Standard
38574 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38575 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38581 \begin_inset Index idx
38584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38592 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38594 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38601 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38607 \begin_layout Section
38608 Comparison of Documents
38609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38611 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38616 \begin_inset Index idx
38619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38620 Comparison of documents
38628 \begin_layout Standard
38629 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38632 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38636 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38637 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38639 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38641 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38645 \begin_inset space ~
38649 \begin_inset space ~
38653 \begin_inset space ~
38662 \begin_inset space ~
38666 \begin_inset space ~
38670 \begin_inset space ~
38674 \begin_inset space ~
38678 \begin_inset space ~
38682 \begin_inset space ~
38687 enables the change tracking option
38690 \begin_inset space ~
38694 \begin_inset space ~
38698 \begin_inset space ~
38703 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38706 \begin_layout Section
38707 International Support
38708 \begin_inset Index idx
38711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38712 International support
38720 \begin_layout Standard
38721 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38722 with any language you want.
38723 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38724 up \SpecialChar LyX
38726 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38728 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38736 \begin_layout Standard
38737 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38738 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38745 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38752 \begin_layout Subsection
38754 \begin_inset Index idx
38757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38764 \begin_inset Index idx
38767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38768 Document ! Settings
38774 \begin_inset Index idx
38777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38778 Document ! Language
38786 \begin_layout Standard
38789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38790 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38793 dialog lets you set
38795 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38800 \begin_layout Standard
38805 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38810 \begin_inset space ~
38815 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38816 For details about the different encoding options see section
38817 \begin_inset space ~
38821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38823 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38830 \begin_layout Subsection
38831 Keyboard mapping configuration
38832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38834 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38841 \begin_layout Standard
38842 If you have for example a U.
38843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38846 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38847 can use an alternate keymap.
38848 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38853 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38854 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38855 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38858 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38859 \begin_inset space ~
38863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38865 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38870 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38871 which one you want to use.
38874 \begin_layout Standard
38875 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38876 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38877 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38881 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38882 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38883 one to support the characters you want.
38884 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38891 \begin_layout Chapter
38894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38896 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38903 \begin_layout Standard
38904 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38905 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38906 topic inside the user's guide.
38909 \begin_layout Section
38911 \begin_inset Index idx
38914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38923 \begin_layout Standard
38928 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38931 \begin_layout Subsection
38935 \begin_layout Standard
38936 Creates a new document.
38939 \begin_layout Subsection
38943 \begin_layout Standard
38944 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38945 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38946 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38948 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38949 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38955 \begin_layout Subsection
38959 \begin_layout Standard
38963 \begin_layout Subsection
38967 \begin_layout Standard
38968 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38969 Click there on a file to open it.
38972 \begin_layout Subsection
38974 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38978 \begin_layout Standard
38980 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38981 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38985 \begin_layout Subsection
38989 \begin_layout Standard
38990 Closes the current document.
38993 \begin_layout Subsection
38997 \begin_layout Standard
38998 Closes all opened documents.
39001 \begin_layout Subsection
39005 \begin_layout Standard
39006 Saves the actual document.
39009 \begin_layout Subsection
39013 \begin_layout Standard
39014 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39015 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39019 \begin_layout Subsection
39021 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39025 \begin_layout Standard
39027 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39028 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39034 \begin_layout Subsection
39038 \begin_layout Standard
39039 Saves all opened documents.
39042 \begin_layout Subsection
39046 \begin_layout Standard
39047 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39050 \begin_layout Subsection
39054 \begin_layout Standard
39055 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39056 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39057 It is described in the section
39059 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39064 Additional Features
39069 \begin_layout Subsection
39073 \begin_layout Standard
39074 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39075 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39077 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39078 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39082 \begin_layout Standard
39083 When using the menu entry
39086 \begin_inset space ~
39091 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39095 \begin_inset space ~
39099 \begin_inset space ~
39103 \begin_inset space ~
39108 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39109 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39112 \begin_layout Subsection
39114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39116 name "subsec:Export"
39123 \begin_layout Standard
39124 You can export your document to various file formats.
39125 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39127 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39128 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39129 during its configuration.
39132 \begin_layout Standard
39133 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39135 \begin_inset space ~
39139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39141 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39148 \begin_layout Description
39154 \begin_inset space ~
39157 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39159 \begin_inset space ~
39162 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39163 \begin_inset Newline newline
39166 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39167 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39171 \begin_layout Description
39172 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39178 \begin_layout Description
39180 \begin_inset space ~
39183 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39189 \begin_layout Description
39190 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39191 's native DVI-format.
39192 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39193 files paths or file names in your document.
39195 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39202 \begin_layout Description
39203 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39204 in files paths or file names
39207 \begin_layout Description
39209 \begin_inset space ~
39216 ) DVI-format using the program
39218 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39221 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39225 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39233 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39241 \begin_layout Description
39243 \begin_inset space ~
39246 (cropped) the same as
39250 but with cropped page margins.
39253 \begin_layout Description
39255 \begin_inset space ~
39258 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39262 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39267 \begin_layout Description
39271 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39279 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39287 \begin_layout Description
39289 \begin_inset space ~
39293 \begin_inset space ~
39296 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39300 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39308 \begin_layout Description
39312 \begin_inset space ~
39321 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39322 source that is compilable with the program
39324 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39328 \begin_layout Description
39332 \begin_inset space ~
39337 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39338 source, additionally all images used in the document
39339 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39343 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39346 \begin_layout Description
39350 \begin_inset space ~
39355 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39356 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39357 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39365 \begin_layout Description
39369 \begin_inset space ~
39378 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39379 source that is compilable with the program
39385 \begin_layout Description
39387 \begin_inset space ~
39391 \begin_inset space ~
39398 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39399 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39405 \begin_layout Description
39407 \begin_inset space ~
39410 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39411 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39417 \begin_inset space \space{}
39422 \begin_inset space ~
39426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39441 represent the version number)
39444 \begin_layout Description
39446 \begin_inset space ~
39450 \begin_inset space ~
39453 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39454 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39455 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39459 \begin_layout Description
39460 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39461 's internal XHTML engine
39464 \begin_layout Description
39466 \begin_inset space ~
39470 \begin_inset space ~
39474 \begin_inset space ~
39478 \begin_inset space ~
39481 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39486 For the conversion the program
39495 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39498 \begin_layout Description
39499 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39504 \begin_layout Description
39506 \begin_inset space ~
39509 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39511 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39514 For the conversion the program
39523 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39526 \begin_layout Description
39528 \begin_inset space ~
39531 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39532 For the conversion the program
39541 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39544 \begin_layout Description
39546 \begin_inset space ~
39549 (cropped) the same as
39552 \begin_inset space ~
39557 but with cropped page margins
39560 \begin_layout Description
39564 \begin_inset space ~
39569 PDF-format using the program
39573 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39576 \begin_layout Description
39580 \begin_inset space ~
39584 \begin_inset space ~
39592 \begin_inset space ~
39597 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39602 \begin_inset space \space{}
39605 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39609 \begin_layout Description
39613 \begin_inset space ~
39618 PDF-format using the program
39620 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39623 , produces PDF-files directly
39626 \begin_layout Description
39630 \begin_inset space ~
39635 PDF-format using the program
39639 , produces PDF-files directly
39642 \begin_layout Description
39646 \begin_inset space ~
39651 PDF-format using the program
39655 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39658 \begin_layout Description
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39667 PDF-format using the program
39672 , produces PDF-files directly
39675 \begin_layout Description
39679 \begin_inset space ~
39687 \begin_layout Description
39691 \begin_inset space ~
39695 \begin_inset space ~
39700 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39701 and then exported as text using the program
39706 \begin_layout Description
39711 PostScript format using the program
39719 options see section
39720 \begin_inset space ~
39724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39726 reference "subsec:General-output"
39733 \begin_layout Description
39734 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39735 source and also code in the statistical programming
39749 it is possible to use
39753 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39757 \begin_layout Standard
39758 If one of the menu entries
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39774 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39776 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39778 \begin_inset space ~
39782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39784 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39789 \begin_inset Index idx
39792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39793 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39802 \begin_layout Subsection
39806 \begin_layout Standard
39807 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39808 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39811 \begin_inset space ~
39815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39817 reference "sec:Paths"
39822 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39831 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39832 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39833 's preferences as described in section
39834 \begin_inset space ~
39838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39840 reference "subsec:Converters"
39847 \begin_layout Subsection
39848 New and Close Window
39851 \begin_layout Standard
39852 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39856 \begin_layout Subsection
39860 \begin_layout Standard
39861 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39864 \begin_layout Section
39866 \begin_inset Index idx
39869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39878 \begin_layout Subsection
39882 \begin_layout Standard
39883 Described in section
39884 \begin_inset space ~
39888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39890 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39897 \begin_layout Subsection
39898 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39901 \begin_layout Standard
39902 Described in section
39903 \begin_inset space ~
39907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39909 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39916 \begin_layout Subsection
39920 \begin_layout Standard
39921 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39922 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39925 \begin_layout Subsection
39929 \begin_layout Standard
39930 Selects the whole document.
39933 \begin_layout Subsection
39934 Find & Replace (Quick)
39937 \begin_layout Standard
39938 Described in section
39939 \begin_inset space ~
39943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39945 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39952 \begin_layout Subsection
39953 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39956 \begin_layout Standard
39957 Described in section
39958 \begin_inset space ~
39962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39964 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39971 \begin_layout Subsection
39972 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39975 \begin_layout Standard
39976 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39980 \begin_layout Subsection
39982 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39986 \begin_layout Standard
39988 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39989 Described in section
39990 \begin_inset space ~
39994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39996 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40005 \begin_layout Subsection
40007 \begin_inset Index idx
40010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40011 Paragraph ! Settings
40019 \begin_layout Standard
40020 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40021 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40025 \begin_layout Standard
40026 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40027 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40033 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40034 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40042 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40046 \begin_layout Subsection
40048 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40052 \begin_layout Standard
40054 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40055 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40060 \begin_layout Enumerate
40062 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40063 Customize text properties by means of the
40069 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40072 ; this is described in section
40073 \begin_inset space ~
40077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40079 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40086 \begin_layout Enumerate
40088 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40089 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40091 Apply last settings
40094 \begin_layout Enumerate
40096 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40097 Change the casing of selected text (
40112 \begin_layout Subsection
40114 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40118 \begin_layout Standard
40120 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40121 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40122 text styles (in the case of this document:
40144 \begin_inset space ~
40148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40150 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40159 \begin_layout Subsection
40160 Table and Rows & Columns
40163 \begin_layout Standard
40164 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40165 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40166 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40169 \begin_layout Subsection
40173 \begin_layout Standard
40174 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40175 It will dissolve this inset.
40176 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40180 \begin_layout Subsection
40184 \begin_layout Standard
40185 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40186 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40189 \begin_layout Subsection
40190 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40193 \begin_layout Standard
40194 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40196 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40197 \begin_inset space ~
40201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40203 reference "sec:Nesting"
40208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40210 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40217 \begin_layout Section
40219 \begin_inset Index idx
40222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40231 \begin_layout Standard
40232 At the bottom of the
40236 menu the opened documents are listed.
40239 \begin_layout Subsection
40240 Open/Close all Insets
40243 \begin_layout Standard
40244 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40247 \begin_layout Subsection
40248 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40251 \begin_layout Standard
40252 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40255 \begin_layout Standard
40256 Math macros are described in the
40263 \begin_layout Subsection
40267 \begin_layout Standard
40268 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40275 reference "sec:Navigating"
40280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40282 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40289 \begin_layout Subsection
40293 \begin_layout Standard
40294 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40296 \begin_inset space ~
40300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40302 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40309 \begin_layout Subsection
40313 \begin_layout Standard
40314 Opens a window showing console messages.
40315 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40320 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40321 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40322 is processing the document.
40325 \begin_layout Subsection
40327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40329 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40334 \begin_inset Index idx
40337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40346 \begin_layout Standard
40347 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40349 All toolbars and the
40352 \begin_inset space ~
40357 can be turned on and off.
40362 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40374 \begin_inset space ~
40386 \begin_inset space ~
40391 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40395 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40402 \begin_layout Standard
40407 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40411 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40412 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40413 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40414 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40415 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40418 \begin_layout Standard
40420 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40421 \begin_inset space ~
40425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40427 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40434 \begin_layout Subsection
40438 \begin_layout Standard
40442 \begin_inset space ~
40446 \begin_inset space ~
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40462 \begin_inset space ~
40467 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40468 's main window vertically while
40471 \begin_inset space ~
40475 \begin_inset space ~
40479 \begin_inset space ~
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40487 \begin_inset space ~
40491 \begin_inset space ~
40496 will split it horizontally.
40497 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40498 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40499 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40500 three or more documents at the same time.
40501 To close a split view, use the menu
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40516 \begin_layout Subsection
40520 \begin_layout Standard
40521 Closes a split view.
40524 \begin_layout Subsection
40528 \begin_layout Standard
40529 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40530 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40531 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40532 's main window fullscreen.
40533 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40534 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40537 \begin_layout Section
40539 \begin_inset Index idx
40542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40551 \begin_layout Subsection
40555 \begin_layout Standard
40556 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40557 \begin_inset space ~
40561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40563 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40574 \begin_layout Subsection
40576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40578 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40585 \begin_layout Standard
40586 Here you can insert the following characters:
40589 \begin_layout Description
40594 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40597 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40598 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40599 -packages you have installed.
40600 You can get a complete display by checking
40603 \begin_inset space ~
40609 \begin_inset Newline newline
40613 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40621 Not all characters will be visible in the
40625 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40626 dialog (see section
40627 \begin_inset space ~
40631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40633 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40637 ) can display every character.
40645 \begin_layout Description
40646 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40650 \begin_layout Description
40652 \begin_inset space ~
40656 \begin_inset space ~
40659 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40660 \begin_inset space ~
40664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40666 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40673 \begin_layout Description
40675 \begin_inset space ~
40678 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40681 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40682 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40688 \begin_layout Description
40690 \begin_inset space ~
40693 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40696 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40697 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40703 \begin_layout Description
40705 \begin_inset space ~
40708 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40712 \begin_layout Description
40714 \begin_inset space ~
40717 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40721 \begin_layout Description
40723 \begin_inset space ~
40727 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
40728 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
40734 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40739 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40745 \begin_inset space \space{}
40748 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40749 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40758 To insert a fraction use the command
40763 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40767 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40776 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40783 \begin_layout Description
40785 \begin_inset space ~
40788 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40792 \begin_layout Description
40794 \begin_inset space ~
40798 \begin_inset Index idx
40801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40808 \begin_inset Index idx
40811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40812 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40817 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40818 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40820 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40826 \begin_inset Index idx
40829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40837 \begin_inset Newline newline
40840 More information about this feature can be found in the
40846 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40852 \begin_layout Description
40853 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40855 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40856 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40860 \begin_layout Subsection
40864 \begin_layout Standard
40865 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40868 \begin_layout Description
40869 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40870 \begin_inset script superscript
40872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40881 \begin_layout Description
40882 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40883 \begin_inset script subscript
40885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40894 \begin_layout Description
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40899 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40906 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40913 \begin_layout Description
40915 \begin_inset space ~
40918 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40925 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40932 \begin_layout Description
40934 \begin_inset space ~
40937 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40938 \begin_inset space ~
40942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40944 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40951 \begin_layout Description
40953 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
40955 \begin_inset space ~
40958 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40964 \begin_inset space \space{}
40967 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40968 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40977 To insert a fraction use the command
40982 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40986 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40995 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41004 \begin_layout Description
41006 \begin_inset space ~
41009 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41010 \begin_inset space ~
41014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41016 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41023 \begin_layout Description
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41028 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41035 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41042 \begin_layout Description
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41047 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41054 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41061 \begin_layout Description
41062 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41069 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41076 \begin_layout Description
41078 \begin_inset space ~
41081 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41088 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41095 \begin_layout Description
41097 \begin_inset space ~
41100 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41107 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41114 \begin_layout Description
41116 \begin_inset space ~
41120 \begin_inset space ~
41123 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41126 \begin_inset space ~
41130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41132 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41139 for a usage example.
41142 \begin_layout Description
41144 \begin_inset space ~
41148 \begin_inset space ~
41151 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41152 \begin_inset space ~
41156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41158 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41165 \begin_layout Description
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41170 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41171 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41174 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41175 \begin_inset space ~
41179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41181 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41188 \begin_layout Description
41190 \begin_inset space ~
41193 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41194 \begin_inset space ~
41198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41200 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41207 \begin_layout Description
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41212 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41213 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41221 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41228 \begin_layout Description
41230 \begin_inset space ~
41233 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41240 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41247 \begin_layout Description
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41256 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41263 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41270 \begin_layout Subsection
41272 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41276 \begin_layout Standard
41278 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41279 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41280 The submenu allows you to insert
41283 \begin_layout Description
41285 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41290 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41293 \begin_layout Description
41295 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41304 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41308 \begin_layout Description
41310 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41315 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41318 \begin_layout Description
41320 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41322 \begin_inset space ~
41325 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41328 \begin_layout Description
41330 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41332 \begin_inset space ~
41336 \begin_inset space ~
41339 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41343 \begin_layout Description
41345 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41347 \begin_inset space ~
41350 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41353 \begin_layout Description
41355 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41365 \begin_inset space ~
41368 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41371 \begin_layout Description
41373 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41378 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41380 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41381 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41387 \begin_layout Description
41389 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41394 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41396 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41397 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41403 \begin_layout Description
41405 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41406 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41407 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41408 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41411 \begin_layout Subsection
41414 List/Contents/References
41417 \begin_layout Standard
41418 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41422 \begin_inset space ~
41443 are described in section
41444 \begin_inset space ~
41448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41450 reference "sec:toc"
41459 is described in section
41460 \begin_inset space ~
41464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41466 reference "sec:Index"
41474 is described in section
41475 \begin_inset space ~
41479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41481 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41487 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41490 is described in section
41491 \begin_inset space ~
41495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41497 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41504 \begin_layout Subsection
41508 \begin_layout Standard
41509 To insert floats, as described in section
41510 \begin_inset space ~
41514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41516 reference "sec:Floats"
41520 and in detail the chapter
41527 \begin_inset space ~
41535 \begin_layout Subsection
41539 \begin_layout Standard
41540 To insert notes, described in section
41541 \begin_inset space ~
41545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41547 reference "sec:Notes"
41554 \begin_layout Subsection
41558 \begin_layout Standard
41559 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41561 Branches are described in section
41562 \begin_inset space ~
41566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41568 reference "sec:Branches"
41575 \begin_layout Subsection
41579 \begin_layout Standard
41580 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41581 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41583 An example is the document class
41584 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41594 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41603 with three custom insets.
41606 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41610 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41616 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41619 \begin_layout Subsection
41621 \begin_inset Index idx
41624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41633 \begin_layout Standard
41634 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41636 For more information see chapter
41638 External Document Parts
41641 \begin_inset space ~
41647 \begin_layout Subsection
41649 \begin_inset Index idx
41652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41661 \begin_layout Standard
41662 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41663 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41670 \begin_inset space ~
41678 \begin_layout Subsection
41682 \begin_layout Standard
41687 dialog as described in section
41688 \begin_inset space ~
41692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41694 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41701 \begin_layout Subsection
41705 \begin_layout Standard
41710 as described in section
41711 \begin_inset space ~
41715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41717 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41724 \begin_layout Subsection
41728 \begin_layout Standard
41733 as described in section
41734 \begin_inset space ~
41738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41740 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41747 \begin_layout Subsection
41749 \begin_inset Index idx
41752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41759 \begin_inset Index idx
41762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41763 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41771 \begin_layout Standard
41772 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41773 Floats are described in section
41774 \begin_inset space ~
41778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41780 reference "sec:Floats"
41784 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41787 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
41795 \begin_inset space ~
41803 \begin_layout Subsection
41807 \begin_layout Standard
41808 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41815 reference "sec:Index"
41822 \begin_layout Subsection
41826 \begin_layout Standard
41827 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41828 \begin_inset space ~
41832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41834 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41841 \begin_layout Subsection
41845 \begin_layout Standard
41846 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41847 Tables are described in section
41848 \begin_inset space ~
41852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41854 reference "sec:Tables"
41858 and in detail in the chapter
41865 \begin_inset space ~
41873 \begin_layout Subsection
41877 \begin_layout Standard
41883 Graphics are described in section
41884 \begin_inset space ~
41888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41890 reference "sec:Graphics"
41897 \begin_layout Subsection
41901 \begin_layout Standard
41902 Inserts a URL as described in section
41903 \begin_inset space ~
41907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41909 reference "subsec:URLs"
41916 \begin_layout Subsection
41920 \begin_layout Standard
41921 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41922 \begin_inset space ~
41926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41928 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41935 \begin_layout Subsection
41939 \begin_layout Standard
41940 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41941 \begin_inset space ~
41945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41947 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41954 \begin_layout Subsection
41958 \begin_layout Standard
41959 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41960 \begin_inset space ~
41964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41966 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41973 \begin_layout Subsection
41976 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41979 \begin_layout Standard
41980 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41981 environments of the same type.
41983 \begin_inset space ~
41987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41989 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41993 for an explanation.
41996 \begin_layout Subsection
42000 \begin_layout Standard
42001 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42002 title or caption of a float.
42003 Inserts a short title as described in section
42004 \begin_inset space ~
42008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42010 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42017 \begin_layout Subsection
42022 \begin_layout Standard
42023 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42024 Code box as described in section
42025 \begin_inset space ~
42029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42031 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42038 \begin_layout Subsection
42040 \begin_inset Index idx
42043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42052 \begin_layout Standard
42053 Inserts a program listings box.
42054 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42056 Program Code Listings
42061 \begin_inset space ~
42069 \begin_layout Subsection
42071 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42075 \begin_layout Standard
42077 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42078 Inserts the actual date.
42079 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42086 \begin_layout Subsection
42090 \begin_layout Standard
42091 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42092 \begin_inset space ~
42096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42098 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42105 \begin_layout Section
42107 \begin_inset Index idx
42110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42119 \begin_layout Standard
42120 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42121 \begin_inset space ~
42124 of the current document.
42125 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42128 \begin_layout Subsection
42132 \begin_layout Standard
42133 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42134 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42135 to jump, for example, between section
42136 \begin_inset space ~
42140 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42141 \begin_inset space ~
42144 2.5 and use the submenu
42147 \begin_inset space ~
42151 \begin_inset space ~
42158 \begin_inset space ~
42164 \begin_inset space ~
42168 \begin_inset space ~
42174 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42178 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42184 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42187 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42190 \begin_layout Standard
42191 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42195 \begin_inset space ~
42200 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42203 \begin_inset space ~
42208 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42211 \begin_layout Subsection
42212 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42215 \begin_layout Standard
42216 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42220 \begin_layout Subsection
42224 \begin_layout Standard
42225 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42226 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42227 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42231 \begin_inset space ~
42235 \begin_inset space ~
42243 \begin_layout Subsection
42247 \begin_layout Standard
42248 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42251 The \SpecialChar LyX
42252 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42254 \begin_inset space ~
42262 \begin_inset space ~
42267 manual for a detailed description.
42270 \begin_layout Section
42272 \begin_inset Index idx
42275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42284 \begin_layout Subsection
42288 \begin_layout Standard
42289 Change Tracking is described in section
42290 \begin_inset space ~
42294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42296 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42303 \begin_layout Subsection
42311 \begin_layout Standard
42312 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42313 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42314 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42316 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42317 to the clipboard or update the view.
42318 \begin_inset Newline newline
42321 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42325 \begin_layout Standard
42328 Open Containing Directory
42330 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42331 's temporary folder for the document.
42332 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42333 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42334 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42335 For example some journals require to send the
42339 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42343 \begin_layout Subsection
42344 Start Appendix Here
42347 \begin_layout Standard
42348 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42349 as described in section
42350 \begin_inset space ~
42354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42356 reference "sec:Appendices"
42363 \begin_layout Subsection
42365 \begin_inset space ~
42371 \begin_layout Standard
42372 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42373 default output format for the document (menu
42375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42376 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42377 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42379 \begin_inset space ~
42383 \begin_inset space ~
42389 \begin_inset space ~
42393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42395 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42399 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42402 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42403 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42405 \begin_inset space ~
42408 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42410 \begin_inset space ~
42413 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42415 \begin_inset space ~
42419 \begin_inset space ~
42425 \begin_inset space ~
42429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42431 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42435 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42436 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42438 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42439 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42441 \begin_inset space ~
42444 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42446 \begin_inset space ~
42449 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42453 \begin_inset space ~
42457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42459 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42464 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42465 when it is first configured.
42466 The default output format is
42469 \begin_inset space ~
42477 \begin_layout Subsection
42478 View (Other Formats)
42481 \begin_layout Standard
42482 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42483 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42484 actual document with an external program.
42485 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42486 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42487 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42489 All possible formats are listed in section
42490 \begin_inset space ~
42494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42496 reference "subsec:Export"
42501 You should at least see the menu entry
42506 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42508 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42510 \begin_inset space ~
42514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42516 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42521 \begin_inset Index idx
42524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42525 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42534 \begin_layout Standard
42535 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42536 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42538 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42539 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42541 \begin_inset space ~
42544 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42546 \begin_inset space ~
42549 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42553 \begin_inset space ~
42557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42559 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42564 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42565 when it is first configured.
42568 \begin_layout Subsection
42570 \begin_inset space ~
42576 \begin_layout Standard
42577 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42578 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42581 \begin_layout Subsection
42582 Update (Other Formats)
42585 \begin_layout Standard
42586 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42587 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42590 \begin_layout Subsection
42591 View Master Document
42594 \begin_layout Standard
42595 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42611 \begin_inset space ~
42616 manual for more information on this topic).
42617 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42618 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42622 \begin_inset space ~
42626 \begin_inset space ~
42631 generates the output of the whole book, while
42635 will just output the chapter alone.
42638 \begin_layout Standard
42639 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42640 in the document settings (menu
42642 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42643 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42644 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42646 \begin_inset space ~
42650 \begin_inset space ~
42656 \begin_inset space ~
42660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42662 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42666 ) or in the preferences (menu
42668 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42669 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42671 \begin_inset space ~
42674 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42676 \begin_inset space ~
42679 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42681 \begin_inset space ~
42685 \begin_inset space ~
42691 \begin_inset space ~
42695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42697 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42704 \begin_layout Subsection
42705 Update Master Document
42708 \begin_layout Standard
42709 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42725 \begin_inset space ~
42730 manual for more information on this topic).
42731 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42732 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42735 \begin_layout Standard
42736 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42737 in the document settings (menu
42739 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42740 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42741 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42743 \begin_inset space ~
42747 \begin_inset space ~
42753 \begin_inset space ~
42757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42759 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42763 ) or in the preferences (menu
42765 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42766 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42768 \begin_inset space ~
42771 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42773 \begin_inset space ~
42776 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42778 \begin_inset space ~
42782 \begin_inset space ~
42788 \begin_inset space ~
42792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42794 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42801 \begin_layout Subsection
42803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42805 name "subsec:Compressed"
42812 \begin_layout Standard
42813 Un/compresses the current document.
42814 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42815 compression (see the
42817 Additional Features
42819 manual for details).
42822 \begin_layout Subsection
42826 \begin_layout Standard
42827 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42830 \begin_layout Subsection
42834 \begin_layout Standard
42835 The document settings are described in appendix
42836 \begin_inset space ~
42840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42842 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42849 \begin_layout Section
42851 \begin_inset Index idx
42854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42863 \begin_layout Subsection
42867 \begin_layout Standard
42868 Spell checking is explained in section
42869 \begin_inset space ~
42873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42875 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42882 \begin_layout Subsection
42886 \begin_layout Standard
42887 The thesaurus is described in section
42888 \begin_inset space ~
42892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42894 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42901 \begin_layout Subsection
42903 \begin_inset Index idx
42906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42913 \begin_inset Index idx
42916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42925 \begin_layout Standard
42926 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42927 the highlighted document part.
42930 \begin_layout Subsection
42936 \begin_inset Index idx
42939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42940 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42949 \begin_layout Standard
42950 Generates with the help of the program
42952 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42955 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42956 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42957 This feature is not available on Windows.
42960 \begin_layout Subsection
42966 \begin_inset Index idx
42969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42979 \begin_layout Standard
42980 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42985 \begin_inset space ~
42990 to see the full filename paths.
42993 \begin_layout Subsection
42995 \begin_inset Index idx
42998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43007 \begin_layout Standard
43008 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43009 files as described in section
43010 \begin_inset space ~
43014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43016 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43023 \begin_layout Subsection
43025 \begin_inset Index idx
43028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43041 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43059 \begin_inset Index idx
43062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43063 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43072 \begin_layout Standard
43073 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43074 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43075 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43076 -packages and programs it needs; see
43078 \begin_inset space ~
43082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43084 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43091 \begin_layout Subsection
43095 \begin_layout Standard
43100 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43101 \begin_inset space ~
43105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43107 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43114 \begin_layout Section
43116 \begin_inset Index idx
43119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43128 \begin_layout Standard
43129 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43130 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43132 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43136 \begin_layout Standard
43140 \begin_inset space ~
43145 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43146 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43147 packages and classes found
43148 by \SpecialChar LyX
43150 \begin_inset space ~
43154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43156 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43163 \begin_layout Standard
43167 \begin_inset space ~
43172 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43177 \begin_layout Section
43179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43181 name "sec:Toolbars"
43188 \begin_layout Standard
43189 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43190 \begin_inset space ~
43194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43196 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43203 \begin_layout Standard
43204 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43205 This is described in the
43207 Additional Features
43212 \begin_layout Subsection
43214 \begin_inset Index idx
43217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43226 \begin_layout Standard
43227 \begin_inset Graphics
43228 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43236 \begin_layout Standard
43237 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43243 \begin_layout Standard
43244 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43261 \begin_inset Note Note
43264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43265 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43270 manual for more information.
43278 \begin_layout Standard
43279 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43285 \begin_layout Standard
43286 \begin_inset Tabular
43287 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43288 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43289 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43290 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43296 \begin_inset Graphics
43297 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43311 pull-down box for the environments
43324 \begin_layout Standard
43325 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43331 \begin_layout Standard
43333 \begin_inset Tabular
43334 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43335 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43336 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43337 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43338 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43361 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43391 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43421 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43437 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43451 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43467 arg "spelling-continuously"
43475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43479 Spellcheck continuously
43485 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43508 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43538 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43545 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43568 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43598 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43628 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43630 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43635 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43653 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43667 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43693 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43707 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43735 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43749 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43750 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43778 Emphasize text, function of the
43779 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43782 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43787 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43789 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43795 arg "dialog-show character"
43806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43827 Set text to noun style, function of the
43828 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43831 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43833 \begin_inset space ~
43836 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43838 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43844 arg "dialog-show character"
43855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43861 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43864 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43877 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43880 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43893 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43898 arg "textstyle-apply"
43908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43913 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43914 Format text using the current settings in the
43916 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43918 \begin_inset space ~
43921 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43956 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43958 \begin_inset space ~
43967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43976 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44004 arg "tabular-insert"
44012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44031 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44034 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44047 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44066 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44078 Toggle outline window on/off,
44080 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44096 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44108 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44114 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44123 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44135 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44148 \begin_layout Subsection
44150 \begin_inset Index idx
44153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44162 \begin_layout Standard
44163 \begin_inset Graphics
44164 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44172 \begin_layout Standard
44173 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44179 \begin_layout Standard
44180 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44184 \begin_layout Standard
44185 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44191 \begin_layout Standard
44192 \begin_inset Tabular
44193 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44194 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44195 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44196 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44233 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44260 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44287 arg "layout-toggle List"
44295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44305 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44314 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44332 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44341 arg "depth-increment"
44349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44355 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44361 \begin_inset space ~
44370 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44379 arg "depth-decrement"
44387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44393 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44395 \begin_inset space ~
44399 \begin_inset space ~
44408 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44417 arg "float-insert figure"
44425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44432 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44439 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44448 arg "float-insert table"
44456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44462 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44463 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44509 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44539 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44560 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44585 \begin_inset space ~
44594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44603 arg "nomencl-insert"
44611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44617 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44619 \begin_inset space ~
44628 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44637 arg "footnote-insert"
44645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44651 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44658 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44667 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44683 \begin_inset space ~
44692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44715 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44716 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44718 \begin_inset space ~
44727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44736 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44812 \begin_inset space ~
44821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44830 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44845 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44852 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44861 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44876 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44878 \begin_inset space ~
44887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44896 arg "dialog-show character"
44904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44910 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44912 \begin_inset space ~
44915 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44928 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44933 arg "textstyle-apply"
44941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44946 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44947 Format text using the recent settings in the
44950 arg "dialog-show character"
44959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44968 arg "layout-paragraph"
44976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44982 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44984 \begin_inset space ~
44993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45002 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45016 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45030 \begin_layout Subsection
45031 View/Update Toolbar
45032 \begin_inset Index idx
45035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45036 Toolbar ! View / Update
45044 \begin_layout Standard
45045 \begin_inset Graphics
45046 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45053 \begin_layout Standard
45054 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45060 \begin_layout Standard
45061 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45065 \begin_layout Standard
45066 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45072 \begin_layout Standard
45073 \begin_inset Tabular
45074 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45075 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45076 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45077 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45108 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45117 arg "buffer-update"
45125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45131 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45147 arg "master-buffer-view"
45155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45161 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45172 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45181 arg "master-buffer-update"
45189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45197 \begin_inset space ~
45201 \begin_inset space ~
45210 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45219 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45233 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45234 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45235 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45236 Synchronize with Output
45242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45253 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45270 View (Other Formats)
45276 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45283 arg "update-others"
45287 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45301 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45302 Update (Other Formats)
45315 \begin_layout Standard
45317 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45318 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45324 \begin_layout Subsection
45328 \begin_layout Standard
45329 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45330 \begin_inset space ~
45334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45336 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45340 , the table toolbar
45341 \begin_inset Index idx
45344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45353 \begin_inset space ~
45358 manual and the math macro toolbar
45359 \begin_inset Index idx
45362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45375 \begin_layout Chapter
45376 The Document Settings
45377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45379 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45384 \begin_inset Index idx
45387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45388 Document ! Settings
45396 \begin_layout Standard
45400 \begin_inset space ~
45405 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45406 is called with the menu
45408 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45412 You can save your document settings as default with the
45414 Save as Document Defaults
45416 button in any dialog.
45417 This will create a template named
45421 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45422 when you create a new document without
45426 \begin_layout Standard
45431 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45432 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45435 \begin_layout Standard
45436 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45437 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45438 to find the one you are looking for.
45439 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45440 the submenus of the dialog.
45442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45446 \begin_inset space \space{}
45450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45457 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45458 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45459 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45462 \begin_layout Section
45466 \begin_layout Standard
45467 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45469 Document classes are described in section
45470 \begin_inset space ~
45474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45476 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45484 \begin_layout Standard
45488 \begin_inset space ~
45493 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45498 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45499 as a layout for a document class.
45500 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45502 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45511 \begin_layout Standard
45512 Some classes use special class options by default.
45513 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45517 and you can decide to use them or not.
45518 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45519 recommended you leave them untouched.
45524 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45525 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45530 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45532 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45538 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45539 \begin_inset Newline newline
45544 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45547 \begin_inset Newline newline
45550 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45551 distribution, see section
45556 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45558 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45571 \begin_layout Standard
45576 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45577 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45578 in the background if the child document
45579 is opened without its master.
45580 This way child documents are always compilable.
45581 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45588 \begin_inset space ~
45596 \begin_layout Standard
45597 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45608 \begin_inset Index idx
45611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45613 packages ! prettyref
45619 \begin_inset Index idx
45622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45624 packages ! refstyle
45629 for cross-references, see section
45630 \begin_inset space ~
45634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45636 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45643 \begin_layout Section
45647 \begin_layout Standard
45648 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45649 Please refer to the section
45652 \begin_inset space ~
45660 \begin_inset space ~
45665 manual for details.
45668 \begin_layout Section
45672 \begin_layout Standard
45673 Modules are explained in section
45674 \begin_inset space ~
45678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45680 reference "subsec:Modules"
45687 \begin_layout Section
45691 \begin_layout Standard
45693 \begin_inset space ~
45697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45699 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45706 \begin_layout Section
45710 \begin_layout Standard
45711 The document font settings are described in section
45712 \begin_inset space ~
45716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45718 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45725 \begin_layout Section
45729 \begin_layout Standard
45730 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45742 \begin_inset space ~
45747 and whether it should be a
45750 \begin_inset space ~
45755 can also be specified here.
45758 \begin_layout Standard
45759 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45760 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45761 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45763 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45766 \begin_layout Standard
45769 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45772 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45773 justifies the text on screen.
45774 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45776 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45780 \begin_layout Standard
45782 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45791 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45796 \begin_layout Section
45800 \begin_layout Standard
45801 This dialog is described in sections
45802 \begin_inset space ~
45806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45808 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45815 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45822 \begin_layout Section
45826 \begin_layout Standard
45827 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45828 \begin_inset space ~
45832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45834 reference "subsec:Margins"
45841 \begin_layout Section
45843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45845 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45850 \begin_inset Index idx
45853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45854 Language ! Encoding
45862 \begin_layout Standard
45863 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45864 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45865 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45867 is always encoded in utf8).
45868 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45869 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45870 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45871 -command is not known for
45872 a particular character).
45873 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45877 \begin_layout Standard
45879 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45880 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45881 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45882 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45883 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45884 's default encoding).
45885 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45886 's Unicode support covers the
45887 characters of most scripts.
45888 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45889 using one of the traditional, or
45890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45897 , encodings is necessary.
45900 \begin_layout Standard
45902 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45904 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45907 Traditional (auto-selected)
45913 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45914 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45915 the given language(s).
45917 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45921 \begin_layout Standard
45923 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45924 If you use the option
45929 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45932 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45933 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45936 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45939 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45940 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45941 exactly one encoding.
45942 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45947 \begin_layout Standard
45949 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45950 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45956 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45957 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45961 \begin_layout Standard
45963 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45964 Finally, you can also select
45968 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45969 Note that this encoding is then used for
45974 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45975 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45979 \begin_layout Standard
45981 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45984 Do not load inputenc
45986 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45987 from automatically loading the
45994 \begin_inset Index idx
45997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45999 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46001 packages ! inputenc
46009 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46010 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46011 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46012 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46013 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46015 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46021 Traditional (auto-selected)
46028 \begin_layout Standard
46030 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46032 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46033 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46034 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46035 installation supports Unicode), choose
46036 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46037 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46038 is quite incomplete, so
46039 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46044 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46045 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46046 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46047 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46048 -commands is not used, because all
46049 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46050 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46051 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46052 , two new alternative engines
46053 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46055 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46057 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46060 \begin_inset space ~
46068 \begin_inset space ~
46076 \begin_inset space ~
46082 \begin_inset space ~
46086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46088 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46093 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46097 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46102 \begin_layout Standard
46106 \begin_inset space ~
46111 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46112 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46122 The possible settings are:
46125 \begin_layout Description
46126 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46128 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46129 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46133 \begin_inset space ~
46137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46139 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46146 \begin_layout Description
46147 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46148 format you will use.
46149 In many cases this will be
46154 \begin_inset Index idx
46157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46165 If the newer package
46170 \begin_inset Index idx
46173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46175 packages ! polyglossia
46180 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46181 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46182 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46184 this package will be used instead of
46191 \begin_layout Description
46193 \begin_inset space ~
46204 would be more appropriate.
46207 \begin_layout Description
46208 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46209 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46213 (for German texts), type in
46216 \begin_inset Newline newline
46221 usepackage{ngerman}
46224 \begin_layout Description
46225 None will not use a language package.
46226 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46229 \begin_layout Standard
46230 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46233 \begin_layout Description
46235 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46237 \begin_inset space ~
46241 \begin_inset space ~
46245 \begin_inset space ~
46252 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46258 \begin_inset Index idx
46261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46263 packages ! inputenc
46269 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46270 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46271 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46277 \begin_layout Description
46278 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46280 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46281 commands, which may result in a big
46282 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46283 -commands are needed.
46285 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46286 This is the same as the
46299 \begin_layout Description
46301 \begin_inset space ~
46305 \begin_inset space ~
46308 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46311 \begin_layout Description
46313 \begin_inset space ~
46317 \begin_inset space ~
46320 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46323 \begin_layout Description
46325 \begin_inset space ~
46328 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46331 \begin_layout Description
46333 \begin_inset space ~
46337 \begin_inset space ~
46340 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46341 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46344 \begin_layout Description
46346 \begin_inset space ~
46350 \begin_inset space ~
46353 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46357 \begin_layout Description
46359 \begin_inset space ~
46363 \begin_inset space ~
46366 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46367 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46370 \begin_layout Description
46372 \begin_inset space ~
46376 \begin_inset space ~
46380 \begin_inset space ~
46383 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46384 \begin_inset space ~
46390 \begin_layout Description
46392 \begin_inset space ~
46396 \begin_inset space ~
46400 \begin_inset space ~
46403 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46404 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46407 \begin_layout Description
46409 \begin_inset space ~
46413 \begin_inset space ~
46416 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46417 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46418 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46419 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46420 \begin_inset space ~
46424 \begin_inset space ~
46430 \begin_layout Description
46432 \begin_inset space ~
46436 \begin_inset space ~
46439 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46440 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46441 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46443 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46444 \begin_inset space ~
46448 \begin_inset space ~
46454 \begin_layout Description
46456 \begin_inset space ~
46460 \begin_inset space ~
46463 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46466 \begin_layout Description
46468 \begin_inset space ~
46472 \begin_inset space ~
46475 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46478 \begin_layout Description
46480 \begin_inset space ~
46484 \begin_inset space ~
46487 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46490 \begin_layout Description
46492 \begin_inset space ~
46495 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46498 \begin_layout Description
46500 \begin_inset space ~
46503 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46506 \begin_layout Description
46508 \begin_inset space ~
46512 \begin_inset space ~
46515 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46518 \begin_layout Description
46520 \begin_inset space ~
46524 \begin_inset space ~
46530 \begin_layout Description
46532 \begin_inset space ~
46536 \begin_inset space ~
46539 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46542 \begin_layout Description
46544 \begin_inset space ~
46548 \begin_inset space ~
46554 \begin_layout Description
46556 \begin_inset space ~
46560 \begin_inset space ~
46563 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46569 \begin_inset Index idx
46572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46579 , when using this, set the document language to
46584 \begin_layout Description
46586 \begin_inset space ~
46590 \begin_inset space ~
46593 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46598 , when using this, set the document language to
46601 \begin_inset space ~
46607 \begin_layout Description
46609 \begin_inset space ~
46613 \begin_inset space ~
46616 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46622 \begin_inset Index idx
46625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46627 packages ! japanese
46632 , when using this, set the document language to
46637 \begin_layout Description
46639 \begin_inset space ~
46643 \begin_inset space ~
46646 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46651 , when using this, set the document language to
46656 \begin_layout Description
46658 \begin_inset space ~
46662 \begin_inset space ~
46665 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46670 , when using this, set the document language to
46675 \begin_layout Description
46677 \begin_inset space ~
46680 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46683 \begin_layout Description
46685 \begin_inset space ~
46689 \begin_inset space ~
46693 \begin_inset space ~
46696 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46699 \begin_layout Description
46701 \begin_inset space ~
46705 \begin_inset space ~
46709 \begin_inset space ~
46712 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46713 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46714 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46717 \begin_layout Description
46719 \begin_inset space ~
46723 \begin_inset space ~
46729 \begin_layout Description
46731 \begin_inset space ~
46735 \begin_inset space ~
46738 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46739 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46742 \begin_layout Description
46744 \begin_inset space ~
46748 \begin_inset space ~
46751 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46757 \begin_inset Index idx
46760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46767 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46768 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46770 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46771 with the default encoding (
46773 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46779 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46780 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46785 \begin_layout Description
46787 \begin_inset space ~
46795 \begin_inset space ~
46798 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46805 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46808 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46815 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46816 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46818 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46821 \begin_layout Description
46823 \begin_inset space ~
46827 \begin_inset space ~
46830 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46836 \begin_inset Index idx
46839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46847 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46850 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46852 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46853 This used to be more comprehensive than
46856 \begin_inset space ~
46861 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46866 \begin_layout Description
46868 \begin_inset space ~
46871 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46877 \begin_inset Index idx
46880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46882 packages ! inputenc
46889 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46890 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46892 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46893 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46894 with the default encoding (
46896 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46902 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46903 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46908 \begin_layout Description
46910 \begin_inset space ~
46914 \begin_inset space ~
46918 \begin_inset space ~
46921 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46922 \begin_inset space ~
46928 \begin_layout Description
46930 \begin_inset space ~
46934 \begin_inset space ~
46938 \begin_inset space ~
46941 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46942 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46943 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46947 \begin_layout Description
46949 \begin_inset space ~
46953 \begin_inset space ~
46957 \begin_inset space ~
46960 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46961 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46964 \begin_layout Section
46966 \begin_inset Index idx
46969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46976 \begin_inset Index idx
46979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46986 \begin_inset Index idx
46989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46990 Color ! Shaded boxes
46996 \begin_inset Index idx
46999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47000 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47008 \begin_layout Standard
47009 Here you can alter the font color for the
47013 (default: black), for
47016 \begin_inset space ~
47021 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47025 (default: white) and for
47028 \begin_inset space ~
47038 sets the color back to the default.
47041 \begin_layout Standard
47042 Clicking any button showing
47050 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47051 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47052 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47053 later more quickly.
47056 \begin_layout Standard
47057 Note, if you change the
47060 \begin_inset space ~
47065 font color and use the option
47068 \begin_inset space ~
47073 in the document settings under
47076 \begin_inset space ~
47081 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47082 \begin_inset space ~
47086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47088 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47095 \begin_layout Standard
47096 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47102 \begin_layout Standard
47106 \begin_inset space ~
47115 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47118 \begin_inset space ~
47121 Code after a forced page break:
47124 \begin_layout Itemize
47125 For the page color:
47126 \begin_inset Newline newline
47133 pagecolor{color name}
47136 \begin_layout Itemize
47137 For the text color:
47138 \begin_inset Newline newline
47148 \begin_layout Standard
47149 You are restricted to one of
47185 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47192 \begin_inset space ~
47198 \begin_inset Newline newline
47201 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47202 names to refer to them:
47205 \begin_layout Itemize
47211 \begin_inset Newline newline
47216 page_backgroundcolor
47219 \begin_layout Itemize
47223 \begin_inset space ~
47229 \begin_inset Newline newline
47237 \begin_layout Itemize
47241 \begin_inset space ~
47247 \begin_inset Newline newline
47255 \begin_layout Itemize
47259 \begin_inset space ~
47265 \begin_inset Newline newline
47273 \begin_layout Standard
47274 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47277 \begin_inset space ~
47285 \begin_inset space ~
47293 \begin_layout Section
47295 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47299 \begin_layout Standard
47301 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47302 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47303 \begin_inset space ~
47307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47309 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47317 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47318 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47321 \begin_layout Standard
47323 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47324 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47326 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47329 \begin_layout Section
47333 \begin_layout Standard
47334 Here you can adjust the
47338 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47342 as described in section
47343 \begin_inset space ~
47347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47349 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47354 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47358 \begin_layout Standard
47360 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47361 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47363 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47364 of this package can be used as well.
47365 The most common one are:
47368 \begin_layout Description
47370 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47371 right Line numbers to the right margin
47374 \begin_layout Description
47376 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47377 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47381 \begin_layout Description
47383 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47384 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47387 \begin_layout Description
47389 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47390 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47393 \begin_layout Description
47395 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47397 \begin_inset space ~
47400 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47405 \begin_layout Section
47409 \begin_layout Standard
47410 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47416 \begin_inset Index idx
47419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47421 packages ! biblatex
47431 \begin_inset Index idx
47434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47446 \begin_inset Index idx
47449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47457 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47460 Sectioned bibliography
47462 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47468 \begin_inset Index idx
47471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47473 packages ! bibtopic
47483 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47484 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47488 for the generation of the bibliography.
47489 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47490 \begin_inset space ~
47494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47496 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47503 \begin_layout Section
47507 \begin_layout Standard
47508 Here you can define the
47512 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47520 reference "sec:Index"
47527 \begin_layout Section
47531 \begin_layout Standard
47532 The PDF properties are explained in section
47533 \begin_inset space ~
47537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47539 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47546 \begin_layout Section
47550 \begin_layout Standard
47551 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47552 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47558 \begin_inset Index idx
47561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47573 \begin_inset Index idx
47576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47588 \begin_inset Index idx
47591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47603 \begin_inset Index idx
47606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47618 \begin_inset Index idx
47621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47623 packages ! mathdots
47633 \begin_inset Index idx
47636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47638 packages ! mathtools
47648 \begin_inset Index idx
47651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47663 \begin_inset Index idx
47666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47668 packages ! stackrel
47678 \begin_inset Index idx
47681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47683 packages ! stmaryrd
47693 \begin_inset Index idx
47696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47698 packages ! undertilde
47703 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47706 \begin_layout Description
47707 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47708 -errors in formulas,
47709 ensure that you have this enabled.
47712 \begin_layout Description
47713 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47714 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47715 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47719 \begin_layout Description
47720 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47723 \begin_inset space ~
47735 \begin_layout Description
47736 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47739 \begin_inset space ~
47751 \begin_layout Description
47752 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47763 \begin_layout Description
47764 mathtools is used for the math commands
47800 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47807 \begin_layout Description
47808 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47810 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47819 \begin_layout Description
47820 stackrel is used for the math command
47837 \begin_layout Description
47838 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47841 \begin_layout Description
47842 undertilde is used for the math command
47850 Accents for one Character
47859 \begin_layout Section
47861 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47863 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47869 \begin_layout Standard
47871 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47872 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47875 \begin_layout Standard
47877 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47878 The float placement options
47879 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47882 are described in the section
47885 \begin_inset space ~
47889 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47891 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47899 \begin_inset space ~
47907 \begin_layout Section
47911 \begin_layout Standard
47912 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47914 Program Code Listings
47919 \begin_inset space ~
47927 \begin_layout Section
47931 \begin_layout Standard
47932 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47940 set to be used and set the
47945 The itemize environment is described in section
47946 \begin_inset space ~
47950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47952 reference "sec:Itemize"
47959 \begin_layout Standard
47960 You can furthermore specify a
47963 \begin_inset space ~
47968 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47969 command of the desired character.
47970 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47977 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47983 \begin_inset space \space{}
47987 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47997 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47998 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48001 \begin_layout Standard
48002 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48010 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48011 -packages in the preamble (menu
48014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48015 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48018 \begin_inset space ~
48024 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48028 usepackage{textcomp}
48031 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48035 usepackage{amssymb}
48045 \begin_layout Section
48049 \begin_layout Standard
48050 Branches are described in section
48051 \begin_inset space ~
48055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48057 reference "sec:Branches"
48064 \begin_layout Section
48066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48068 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48075 \begin_layout Standard
48076 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48079 \begin_layout Description
48081 \begin_inset space ~
48085 \begin_inset space ~
48088 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48108 View Master Document
48109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48116 Update Master Document
48117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48124 menu or the toolbar.
48125 The default is set in
48127 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48128 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48130 \begin_inset space ~
48133 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48137 \begin_inset space ~
48141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48143 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48150 \begin_layout Description
48152 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48154 \begin_inset space ~
48158 \begin_inset space ~
48162 \begin_inset space ~
48165 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48170 option which is needed with some packages.
48171 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48172 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48175 \begin_layout Description
48177 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48179 \begin_inset space ~
48183 \begin_inset space ~
48186 Options offers settings for the
48194 \begin_layout Itemize
48198 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48200 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48202 \begin_inset space ~
48208 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48210 \begin_inset space ~
48214 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48220 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48222 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48223 settings for the menu
48225 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48229 \begin_inset space ~
48233 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48236 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48237 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48242 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48244 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48246 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48249 or a detailed description see section
48251 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48256 \begin_inset space ~
48262 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48266 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48270 \begin_layout Itemize
48272 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48275 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48277 determines whether so-called
48278 \begin_inset Quotes els
48282 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48286 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48288 \begin_inset Quotes els
48292 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48295 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48296 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48297 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48299 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48301 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48302 macros, you can uncheck this.
48303 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48310 \begin_layout Description
48312 \begin_inset space ~
48316 \begin_inset space ~
48319 Options offers settings for the export format
48327 \begin_inset space ~
48332 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48333 \begin_inset space ~
48336 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48340 \begin_inset space ~
48345 settings are described in detail in section
48347 Math Output in XHTML
48352 \begin_inset space ~
48361 \begin_inset space ~
48365 \begin_inset space ~
48370 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48373 \begin_layout Description
48375 \begin_inset space ~
48380 Save transient properties
48382 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48383 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48384 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48388 \begin_layout Itemize
48389 the activation of change tracking
48392 \begin_layout Itemize
48393 the output of tracked changes
48396 \begin_layout Itemize
48397 the recording of the document directory path.
48400 \begin_layout Standard
48401 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48402 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48406 \begin_layout Section
48414 \begin_layout Standard
48415 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48417 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48419 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48421 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48425 \begin_layout Standard
48426 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48427 -syntax is given in section
48428 \begin_inset space ~
48432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48434 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48441 \begin_layout Chapter
48447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48449 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48454 \begin_inset Index idx
48457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48466 \begin_layout Standard
48467 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48469 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48473 It has the following submenus.
48476 \begin_layout Section
48480 \begin_layout Subsection
48484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48485 User Interface File
48486 \begin_inset Index idx
48489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48490 Customization ! of toolbars
48496 \begin_inset Index idx
48499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48500 Customization ! of menus
48508 \begin_layout Standard
48509 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48510 interface (ui) file.
48511 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48519 \begin_layout Description
48524 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48527 \begin_layout Description
48534 the menu entries in popup context menus
48537 \begin_layout Description
48542 specifies the toolbar buttons
48545 \begin_layout Standard
48546 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48547 and edit the entries.
48550 \begin_layout Standard
48551 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48563 entries must be finished with an explicit
48588 and in the case of the
48589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48601 The syntax for the entries is:
48604 \begin_layout Standard
48605 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48634 \begin_layout Standard
48636 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48639 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48640 -functions are listed in the menu
48642 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48644 \begin_inset space ~
48652 \begin_layout Standard
48653 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48659 \begin_layout Standard
48660 For example, assuming you use the menu
48662 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48665 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48669 \begin_layout Standard
48670 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48694 \begin_layout Standard
48696 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48711 to have the sixth bookmark.
48714 \begin_layout Standard
48718 \begin_inset space ~
48723 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48724 's toolbar buttons.
48725 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48726 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48729 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48737 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48741 \begin_layout Standard
48744 Enable tool tips in main work area
48746 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48754 \begin_layout Standard
48759 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48760 should display in the menu
48762 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48764 \begin_inset space ~
48772 \begin_layout Subsection
48776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48780 \begin_layout Standard
48783 Restore window layouts and geometries
48786 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48787 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48791 \begin_layout Standard
48794 Restore cursor positions
48796 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48800 \begin_layout Standard
48803 Load opened files from last session
48805 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48809 \begin_layout Standard
48812 Clear all session information
48814 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48815 sessions (cursor positions, names
48816 of last opened documents, etc.).
48819 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48823 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48828 \begin_inset Index idx
48831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48840 \begin_layout Standard
48843 Backup original documents when saving
48845 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48846 it was saved the last time.
48847 It is stored in the
48850 \begin_inset space ~
48856 \begin_inset space ~
48860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48862 reference "sec:Paths"
48866 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48869 \begin_inset space ~
48875 The backup file has the file extension
48876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48890 \begin_layout Standard
48893 Backup documents, every
48895 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48898 \begin_layout Standard
48901 Save documents compressed by default
48903 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48904 \begin_inset space ~
48908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48910 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48915 This applies to newly created documents only.
48916 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48920 Windows & work area
48923 \begin_layout Standard
48926 Open documents in tabs
48928 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48932 \begin_layout Standard
48937 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48944 \begin_inset space ~
48948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48950 reference "sec:Paths"
48954 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48961 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48962 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48963 of \SpecialChar LyX
48965 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48966 instance is created for each file.
48969 \begin_layout Standard
48972 Single close-tab button
48974 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48984 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48985 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48986 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48990 \begin_layout Standard
48991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48999 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49000 before the change takes effect.
49008 \begin_layout Standard
49013 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49015 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49017 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49021 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49022 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49023 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49026 \begin_layout Subsection
49028 \begin_inset Index idx
49031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49040 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49047 \begin_layout Standard
49048 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49052 \begin_layout Standard
49053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49061 This section only deals with the fonts
49065 the \SpecialChar LyX
49067 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49070 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49071 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49082 \begin_layout Standard
49083 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49100 (depends on the system) as its
49103 \begin_inset space ~
49119 \begin_layout Standard
49120 You can change the font size with the
49127 \begin_layout Standard
49132 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49137 points have the size of 1
49138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49142 \begin_inset space ~
49146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49148 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49153 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49158 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49159 \begin_inset space ~
49163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49165 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49172 \begin_layout Subsection
49174 \begin_inset Index idx
49177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49178 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49185 \begin_inset Index idx
49188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49197 \begin_layout Standard
49198 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49199 by choosing an item in the
49200 list and selecting the
49207 \begin_layout Standard
49208 By checking the option
49212 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49215 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49216 \begin_inset space ~
49220 \begin_inset space ~
49225 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49228 \begin_layout Subsection
49230 \begin_inset Index idx
49233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49242 \begin_layout Standard
49243 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49247 \begin_layout Standard
49252 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49253 This feature is described in section
49254 \begin_inset space ~
49258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49260 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49267 \begin_layout Standard
49268 Checking the option
49271 \begin_inset space ~
49275 \begin_inset space ~
49279 \begin_inset space ~
49284 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49287 \begin_layout Section
49289 \begin_inset Index idx
49292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49301 \begin_layout Subsection
49305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49309 \begin_layout Standard
49312 Cursor follows scrollbar
49314 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49318 \begin_layout Standard
49319 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49320 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49321 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49324 \begin_layout Standard
49327 Scroll below end of document
49329 is self-explanatory.
49332 \begin_layout Standard
49333 In \SpecialChar LyX
49334 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49341 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49343 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49344 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49345 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49349 \begin_layout Standard
49351 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49354 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49356 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49357 paste operations (i.
49358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49361 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49362 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49363 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49364 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49365 dissolving from insets.
49370 \begin_layout Standard
49373 Sort environments alphabetically
49375 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49378 \begin_layout Standard
49381 Group environments by their category
49383 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49386 \begin_layout Standard
49391 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49402 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49406 \begin_layout Standard
49407 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49412 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49413 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49417 \begin_layout Subsection
49419 \begin_inset Index idx
49422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49429 \begin_inset Index idx
49432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49433 Settings ! Shortcuts
49441 \begin_layout Standard
49446 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49448 Several binding files are available, among them:
49451 \begin_layout Description
49452 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49455 \begin_layout Description
49456 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49468 \begin_layout Description
49469 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49480 \begin_layout Standard
49481 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49486 , and binding files for special languages.
49487 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49492 \begin_inset space \space{}
49496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49504 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49505 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49506 will try to use the appropriate binding
49510 \begin_layout Standard
49511 Some binding files, like
49515 , only have a limited scope.
49516 When looking at the end of the file
49520 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49523 \begin_layout Standard
49527 \begin_inset space ~
49531 \begin_inset space ~
49536 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49537 in the selected key binding file.
49540 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49544 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49549 \begin_inset Index idx
49552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49553 Key Bindings ! Editing
49561 \begin_layout Standard
49562 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49563 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49564 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49565 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49568 Show key-bindings containing
49571 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49572 Insert there for example as keyword
49573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49580 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49581 functions that contain
49582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49590 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49591 All \SpecialChar LyX
49592 functions are also listed in the file
49597 that you will find in the
49604 \begin_layout Standard
49605 For example, to add the shortcut
49613 , select the function and press the
49618 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49619 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49622 \begin_layout Standard
49623 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49624 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49626 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49627 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49629 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49634 \begin_layout Standard
49635 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49638 \begin_layout Standard
49639 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49641 The syntax of the entries is:
49644 \begin_layout Standard
49650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49669 \begin_layout Standard
49670 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49671 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49699 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49700 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49701 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49702 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49704 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49708 , you needed to specify it as
49713 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49716 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49719 \begin_layout Subsection
49721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49723 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49728 \begin_inset Index idx
49731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49738 \begin_inset Index idx
49741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49742 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49750 \begin_layout Standard
49751 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49752 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49753 provides keyboard maps.
49754 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49755 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49758 \begin_inset space ~
49762 \begin_inset space ~
49767 and select the keyboard map file named
49774 \begin_layout Standard
49783 keyboard map and, if you use the
49787 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49790 arg "keymap-primary"
49796 arg "keymap-secondary"
49799 respectively or toggle between them with
49802 arg "keymap-toggle"
49808 \begin_layout Standard
49809 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49817 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49826 \begin_layout Standard
49827 You can also specify the mouse
49829 Wheel scrolling speed
49832 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49836 Middle mouse button pasting
49838 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49839 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49842 \begin_layout Standard
49850 \begin_inset space ~
49854 \begin_inset space ~
49859 you can select a key for zooming.
49860 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49863 \begin_layout Subsection
49867 \begin_layout Standard
49868 Input completion is described in section
49869 \begin_inset space ~
49873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49875 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49882 \begin_layout Section
49884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49891 \begin_inset Index idx
49894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49901 \begin_inset Index idx
49904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49913 \begin_layout Standard
49914 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49915 are normally determined during
49917 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49920 \begin_layout Description
49922 \begin_inset space ~
49925 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49926 's working directory.
49927 It is the default when you
49938 \begin_inset space ~
49946 \begin_layout Description
49948 \begin_inset space ~
49951 templates This directory
49952 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49953 contains the templates that are shown
49954 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49955 will be opened when you use the menu
49956 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49961 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49963 \begin_inset space ~
49967 \begin_inset space ~
49975 \begin_layout Description
49977 \begin_inset space ~
49980 files This directory
49981 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49982 will be opened when you use the
49983 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49984 contains the example files that are listed in
49987 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49996 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49998 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50000 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50006 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50008 \begin_inset Newline newline
50012 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50024 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50025 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50035 \begin_layout Description
50037 \begin_inset space ~
50041 \begin_inset Index idx
50044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50050 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50051 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50052 \begin_inset space ~
50056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50058 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50066 will be used to save the backups.
50067 \begin_inset Newline newline
50070 Backup files have the ending
50071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50081 \begin_layout Description
50083 \begin_inset space ~
50086 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50087 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50089 \begin_inset Newline newline
50096 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50102 You can edit this file with the program
50111 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50112 in its preferences under
50115 \begin_inset space ~
50121 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50126 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50128 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50129 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50135 and \SpecialChar LyX
50136 need to be running the same time.
50137 \begin_inset Newline newline
50140 The pipe is also used for the
50144 feature, see section
50145 \begin_inset space ~
50149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50151 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50156 \begin_inset Newline newline
50159 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50160 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50161 \begin_inset Newline newline
50177 \begin_layout Description
50179 \begin_inset space ~
50182 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50185 \begin_layout Description
50187 \begin_inset space ~
50190 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50191 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50192 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50195 \begin_layout Description
50197 \begin_inset space ~
50200 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50206 You only need to specify it if you are using
50210 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50212 For \SpecialChar LyX
50217 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50221 \begin_layout Description
50223 \begin_inset space ~
50226 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50227 When \SpecialChar LyX
50228 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50229 to find it on the system.
50230 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50232 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50241 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50242 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50245 \begin_layout Description
50247 \begin_inset space ~
50250 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50251 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50252 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50253 code or in the document
50255 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50257 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50258 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50259 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50260 scanned for the input files.
50261 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50262 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50264 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50265 compilation may fail for some documents.
50268 \begin_layout Section
50272 \begin_layout Standard
50273 Here you can insert your
50282 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50284 \begin_inset space ~
50288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50290 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50294 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50297 \begin_layout Section
50299 \begin_inset Index idx
50302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50303 Language ! Settings
50309 \begin_inset Index idx
50312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50313 Settings ! Language
50321 \begin_layout Subsection
50323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50325 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50332 \begin_layout Description
50334 \begin_inset space ~
50338 \begin_inset space ~
50341 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50343 You can find its actual translation status here:
50344 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50346 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50352 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50358 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50359 LaTeX Language Support
50364 \begin_layout Description
50366 \begin_inset space ~
50369 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50370 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50371 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50372 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50389 The most widespread language package is
50394 \begin_inset Index idx
50397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50404 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50406 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50407 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50408 come with the alternative
50414 \begin_inset Index idx
50417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50419 packages ! polyglossia
50424 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50425 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50431 The available selections are described in section
50432 \begin_inset space ~
50436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50438 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50445 \begin_layout Description
50447 \begin_inset space ~
50451 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50452 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50453 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50455 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50459 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50463 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50465 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50469 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50470 that is used to switch to a different language
50471 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50472 to start the package
50476 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50477 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50481 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50482 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50485 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50489 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50497 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50505 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50508 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50510 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50514 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50532 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50533 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50540 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50541 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50546 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50551 , this setting is ignored.
50556 \begin_layout Description
50558 \begin_inset space ~
50562 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50569 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50570 Use this if the language switch set in
50574 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50578 's alternative command
50582 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50583 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50586 end{otherlanguage*}
50590 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50591 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50592 command toggles the package on and off
50593 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50594 Empty by default, as
50598 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50600 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50605 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50611 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50616 , this setting is ignored.
50621 \begin_layout Description
50623 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50625 \begin_inset space ~
50629 \begin_inset space ~
50632 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50636 \begin_layout Description
50638 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50640 \begin_inset space ~
50644 \begin_inset space ~
50647 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50653 \begin_layout Description
50655 \begin_inset space ~
50659 \begin_inset space ~
50663 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50665 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50668 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50669 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50672 to the document class options
50673 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50674 rather than the language package options.
50675 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50679 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50680 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50682 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50683 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50685 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50690 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50691 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50700 \begin_layout Description
50702 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50704 \begin_inset space ~
50708 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50710 \begin_inset space ~
50714 \begin_inset space ~
50718 \begin_inset space ~
50724 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50726 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50729 this option is set,
50730 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50731 the language switch defined in
50734 \begin_inset space ~
50739 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50740 to the document language.
50741 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50742 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50745 \begin_inset space ~
50750 or if a package resets the document language.
50751 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50752 usually should be the document language).
50753 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50754 documents start with the chosen document language.
50755 When this option is not set, the
50758 \begin_inset space ~
50763 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50765 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50768 \begin_inset space ~
50778 \begin_layout Description
50780 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50782 \begin_inset space ~
50786 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50788 \begin_inset space ~
50792 \begin_inset space ~
50796 \begin_inset space ~
50802 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50806 \begin_inset space ~
50810 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50811 Set document language explicitly
50817 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50819 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50825 \begin_inset space ~
50831 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50833 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50837 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50839 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50842 the end of the document.
50843 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50848 \paragraph_spacing single
50850 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50856 \begin_layout Description
50858 \begin_inset space ~
50862 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50864 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50868 \begin_inset space ~
50872 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50874 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50876 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50880 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50883 in a language different
50884 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50886 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50889 the document language will be
50890 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50891 marked (by default with a blue
50894 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50896 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50900 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50904 \begin_layout Description
50906 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50908 \begin_inset space ~
50912 \begin_inset space ~
50916 \begin_inset space ~
50919 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50920 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50921 switched via the operating system.
50922 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50927 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50928 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50933 \begin_layout Description
50935 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50937 \begin_inset space ~
50941 \begin_inset space ~
50944 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50945 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50950 \begin_layout Description
50952 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50954 \begin_inset space ~
50958 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50960 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50964 \begin_inset space ~
50968 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50969 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50970 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50972 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50976 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50978 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50979 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50981 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50982 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50983 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50985 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50990 \begin_layout Standard
50995 means that the cursor
50996 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50997 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50998 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51003 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51004 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51008 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51010 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51011 specific case always means: move
51015 in text (even if this means:
51021 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51022 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51023 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51024 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51025 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51037 \begin_layout Standard
51039 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51044 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51045 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51046 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51050 ) when coming from the left.
51051 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51053 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51054 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51055 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51062 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51066 \begin_layout Description
51068 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51070 \begin_inset space ~
51074 \begin_inset space ~
51077 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51078 separator alignment).
51079 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51084 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51085 (static) custom character here.
51088 \begin_layout Description
51090 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51092 \begin_inset space ~
51096 \begin_inset space ~
51099 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51105 \begin_layout Subsection
51109 \begin_layout Standard
51110 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51111 \begin_inset space ~
51115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51117 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51124 \begin_layout Section
51128 \begin_layout Subsection
51130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51132 name "subsec:General-output"
51139 \begin_layout Description
51141 \begin_inset space ~
51144 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51146 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51148 \begin_inset space ~
51154 For a detailed description see section
51156 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51161 \begin_inset space ~
51169 \begin_layout Description
51171 \begin_inset space ~
51174 Options Options for the program
51178 that is used for the export format
51183 \begin_inset space ~
51187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51189 reference "subsec:Export"
51194 Possible options are listed in the
51199 \begin_inset Newline newline
51203 \begin_inset Flex URL
51206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51208 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51218 \begin_layout Description
51220 \begin_inset space ~
51224 \begin_inset space ~
51227 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51230 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51231 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51233 \begin_inset space ~
51239 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51242 \begin_layout Description
51244 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51246 \begin_inset space ~
51250 \begin_inset Index idx
51253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51260 \begin_inset Index idx
51263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51264 Settings ! Date format
51269 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51270 \begin_inset Newline newline
51274 \begin_inset Flex URL
51277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51279 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51285 \begin_inset Newline newline
51288 For example the format
51289 \begin_inset Newline newline
51293 \begin_inset Newline newline
51296 prints the date as day/month/year.
51301 \begin_layout Description
51303 \begin_inset space ~
51307 \begin_inset space ~
51310 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51311 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51314 \begin_layout Subsection
51320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51322 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51327 \begin_inset Index idx
51330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51331 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51340 \begin_layout Description
51342 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51344 \begin_inset space ~
51352 \begin_inset space ~
51356 \begin_inset space ~
51359 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51364 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51385 are used for Cyrillic.
51386 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51399 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51401 sets up in the background.
51402 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51407 \begin_layout Description
51409 \begin_inset space ~
51413 \begin_inset space ~
51417 \begin_inset space ~
51421 \begin_inset space ~
51424 options They only have an effect when the program
51428 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51431 \begin_layout Standard
51432 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51433 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51434 manuals of the applications.
51437 \begin_layout Description
51439 \begin_inset space ~
51442 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51443 \begin_inset space ~
51447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51449 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51456 \begin_layout Description
51458 \begin_inset space ~
51461 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51462 \begin_inset space ~
51466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51468 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51475 \begin_layout Description
51477 \begin_inset space ~
51480 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51481 \begin_inset space ~
51485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51487 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51494 \begin_layout Description
51500 \begin_inset space ~
51503 command Command for the program
51505 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51508 that is described in the section
51510 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51515 Additional Features
51520 \begin_layout Standard
51521 There are additionally the following options:
51524 \begin_layout Description
51526 \begin_inset space ~
51530 \begin_inset space ~
51534 \begin_inset space ~
51538 \begin_inset space ~
51543 \begin_inset space ~
51546 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51564 to separate folders.
51565 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51567 \begin_inset Index idx
51570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51577 \begin_inset Index idx
51580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51589 \begin_layout Description
51591 \begin_inset space ~
51595 \begin_inset space ~
51599 \begin_inset space ~
51603 \begin_inset space ~
51607 \begin_inset space ~
51611 \begin_inset space ~
51614 changes Removes all manually set
51620 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51621 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51623 \begin_inset space ~
51628 dialog when changing the document class.
51631 \begin_layout Section
51633 \begin_inset space ~
51637 \begin_inset Index idx
51640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51649 \begin_layout Subsection
51651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51653 name "subsec:Converters"
51658 \begin_inset Index idx
51661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51670 \begin_layout Standard
51671 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51672 from one format to another.
51673 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51674 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51681 \begin_inset space ~
51686 field and press the
51691 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51695 \begin_inset space ~
51700 drop-down list, modify the
51704 field and press the
51711 \begin_layout Standard
51714 Converter File Cache
51720 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51722 Maximum Age (in days
51725 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51726 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51729 \begin_layout Standard
51730 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51731 definition, is described in the section
51742 \begin_layout Subsection
51744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51746 name "sec:File-Formats"
51751 \begin_inset Index idx
51754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51761 \begin_inset Index idx
51764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51773 \begin_layout Standard
51774 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51784 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51787 \begin_layout Standard
51788 You can also define the
51790 Default output format
51792 that is used when you use
51794 View, Update, View Master Document
51798 Update Master Document
51804 menu or the toolbar.
51807 \begin_layout Standard
51808 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51819 \begin_layout Standard
51820 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51822 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51823 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51824 This is done by specifying a
51829 More about this is described in the section
51840 \begin_layout Chapter
51841 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51843 \begin_inset Index idx
51846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51855 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51862 \begin_layout Standard
51864 \begin_inset space ~
51868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51870 reference "tab:Units"
51874 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51875 and used in this documentation.
51878 \begin_layout Standard
51879 \begin_inset Float table
51886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51887 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51905 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51913 \begin_inset Tabular
51914 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51915 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51916 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51917 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51918 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52071 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52342 scaled point (65536
52343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52410 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52534 % of original image width
52539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52623 \begin_layout Standard
52624 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52627 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52634 \begin_layout Bibliography
52635 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52636 LatexCommand bibitem
52643 The \SpecialChar LyX
52645 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52648 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52654 \begin_inset Newline newline
52658 \begin_inset Flex URL
52661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52663 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52671 \begin_layout Bibliography
52672 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52673 LatexCommand bibitem
52674 key "latexcompanion"
52679 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52681 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52682 Companion Second Edition.
52685 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52688 \begin_layout Bibliography
52689 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52690 LatexCommand bibitem
52696 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52699 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52703 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52706 \begin_layout Bibliography
52707 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52708 LatexCommand bibitem
52717 : A Document Preparation System.
52720 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52723 \begin_layout Bibliography
52724 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52725 LatexCommand bibitem
52735 The \SpecialChar TeX
52739 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52742 \begin_layout Bibliography
52743 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52744 LatexCommand bibitem
52750 The \SpecialChar TeX
52752 \begin_inset Newline newline
52756 \begin_inset Flex URL
52759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52761 https://ctan.org/topic
52769 \begin_layout Bibliography
52770 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52771 LatexCommand bibitem
52777 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52779 \begin_inset Newline newline
52783 \begin_inset Flex URL
52786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52788 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52796 \begin_layout Bibliography
52797 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52798 LatexCommand bibitem
52805 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52807 name "Documentation"
52808 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52815 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52819 \begin_inset Newline newline
52823 \begin_inset Flex URL
52826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52828 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52836 \begin_layout Bibliography
52837 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52838 LatexCommand bibitem
52845 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52847 name "Documentation"
52848 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52853 how to use the program
52855 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52859 \begin_inset Newline newline
52863 \begin_inset Flex URL
52866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52868 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52876 \begin_layout Bibliography
52877 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52878 LatexCommand bibitem
52885 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52887 name "Documentation"
52888 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52893 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52899 \begin_inset Index idx
52902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52904 packages ! biblatex
52910 \begin_inset Newline newline
52914 \begin_inset Flex URL
52917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52919 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52927 \begin_layout Bibliography
52928 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52929 LatexCommand bibitem
52936 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52938 name "Documentation"
52939 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52944 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52950 \begin_inset Index idx
52953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52961 \begin_inset Newline newline
52965 \begin_inset Flex URL
52968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52970 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52978 \begin_layout Bibliography
52979 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52980 LatexCommand bibitem
52987 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52989 name "Documentation"
52990 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53000 \begin_inset Newline newline
53004 \begin_inset Flex URL
53007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53009 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53017 \begin_layout Bibliography
53018 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53019 LatexCommand bibitem
53020 key "makeindex-man"
53026 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53029 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53039 \begin_inset Newline newline
53043 \begin_inset Flex URL
53046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53048 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53056 \begin_layout Bibliography
53057 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53058 LatexCommand bibitem
53065 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53067 name "Documentation"
53068 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53078 \begin_inset Newline newline
53082 \begin_inset Flex URL
53085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53087 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53095 \begin_layout Bibliography
53096 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53097 LatexCommand bibitem
53104 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53106 name "Documentation"
53107 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53112 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53114 \begin_inset Newline newline
53118 \begin_inset Flex URL
53121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53123 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53131 \begin_layout Bibliography
53132 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53133 LatexCommand bibitem
53140 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53142 name "Documentation"
53143 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53148 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53154 \begin_inset Index idx
53157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53165 \begin_inset Newline newline
53169 \begin_inset Flex URL
53172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53174 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53182 \begin_layout Bibliography
53183 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53184 LatexCommand bibitem
53191 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53193 name "Documentation"
53194 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53199 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53205 \begin_inset Index idx
53208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53210 packages ! enumitem
53216 \begin_inset Newline newline
53220 \begin_inset Flex URL
53223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53225 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53233 \begin_layout Bibliography
53234 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53235 LatexCommand bibitem
53242 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53244 name "Documentation"
53245 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53250 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53256 \begin_inset Index idx
53259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53261 packages ! fancyhdr
53267 \begin_inset Newline newline
53271 \begin_inset Flex URL
53274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53276 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53284 \begin_layout Bibliography
53285 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53286 LatexCommand bibitem
53293 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53295 name "Documentation"
53296 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53301 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53307 \begin_inset Index idx
53310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53312 packages ! hyperref
53318 \begin_inset Newline newline
53322 \begin_inset Flex URL
53325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53327 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53335 \begin_layout Bibliography
53336 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53337 LatexCommand bibitem
53344 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53346 name "Documentation"
53347 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53352 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53358 \begin_inset Index idx
53361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53363 packages ! microtype
53369 \begin_inset Newline newline
53373 \begin_inset Flex URL
53376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53378 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53386 \begin_layout Bibliography
53387 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53388 LatexCommand bibitem
53395 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53397 name "Documentation"
53398 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53403 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53409 \begin_inset Index idx
53412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53420 \begin_inset Newline newline
53424 \begin_inset Flex URL
53427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53429 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53437 \begin_layout Bibliography
53438 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53439 LatexCommand bibitem
53446 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53448 name "Documentation"
53449 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53454 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53460 \begin_inset Index idx
53463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53465 packages ! prettyref
53471 \begin_inset Newline newline
53475 \begin_inset Flex URL
53478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53480 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53488 \begin_layout Bibliography
53489 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53490 LatexCommand bibitem
53497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53499 name "Documentation"
53500 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53505 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53511 \begin_inset Index idx
53514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53516 packages ! refstyle
53522 \begin_inset Newline newline
53526 \begin_inset Flex URL
53529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53531 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53539 \begin_layout Bibliography
53540 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53541 LatexCommand bibitem
53548 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53551 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53556 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53558 \begin_inset Newline newline
53562 \begin_inset Flex URL
53565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53567 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53575 \begin_layout Bibliography
53576 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53577 LatexCommand bibitem
53584 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53587 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53592 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53594 \begin_inset Newline newline
53598 \begin_inset Flex URL
53601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53603 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53611 \begin_layout Bibliography
53612 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53613 LatexCommand bibitem
53620 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53623 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53628 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53629 for Cyrillic languages:
53630 \begin_inset Newline newline
53634 \begin_inset Flex URL
53637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53639 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53647 \begin_layout Bibliography
53648 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53649 LatexCommand bibitem
53656 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53659 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53664 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53666 \begin_inset Newline newline
53670 \begin_inset Flex URL
53673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53675 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53683 \begin_layout Bibliography
53684 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53685 LatexCommand bibitem
53692 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53695 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53700 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53702 \begin_inset Newline newline
53706 \begin_inset Flex URL
53709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53711 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53719 \begin_layout Bibliography
53720 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53721 LatexCommand bibitem
53728 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53731 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53736 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53738 \begin_inset Newline newline
53742 \begin_inset Flex URL
53745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53747 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53755 \begin_layout Standard
53756 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53790 \begin_inset Note Note
53793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53800 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53801 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53802 bibliography is the second one:
53810 \begin_layout Standard
53811 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53812 LatexCommand bibtex
53813 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53814 options "biblio/alphadin"
53821 \begin_layout Standard
53822 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53826 \begin_layout Standard
53830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53836 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53845 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53853 \begin_inset Note Note
53856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53857 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53858 \begin_inset space ~
53862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53864 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53876 \begin_layout Standard
53877 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53878 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53884 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53885 LatexCommand printindex